Canon 6d mark ii инструкция на русском скачать pdf

У вас уже есть продукция Canon? Зарегистрируйте свои продукты для доступа к программному обеспечению и обновлениям встроенного ПО, а также подпишитесь на рассылку, чтобы получать персонализированные советы и эксклюзивные предложения

Canon EOS 6D Mark II

Поддержка

Загружайте ПО, встроенное ПО и руководства, а также получите доступ к материалам поддержки для вашего продукта серии EOS.

Драйверы

Для выполнения подключения некоторых устройств к компьютеру может потребоваться драйвер. На этой вкладке вы найдете соответствующие драйверы для своего устройства или, в случае отсутствия драйверов, описание совместимости устройства с каждой операционной системой.

Полезная информация. Доступ к программному обеспечению, руководствам и другим материалам можно получить с помощью вкладок, расположенных выше.

Операционная система Обнаруженная операционная система

Программное обеспечение

Программное обеспечение загружать необязательно, но оно обеспечивает дополнительные функции и позволяет максимально эффективно пользоваться возможностями устройства. На этой вкладке можно просмотреть и загрузить доступное программное обеспечение для вашего устройства.

Операционная система Обнаруженная операционная система

Программное обеспечение

Программное обеспечение загружать необязательно, но оно обеспечивает дополнительные функции и позволяет максимально эффективно пользоваться возможностями устройства. На этой вкладке можно просмотреть и загрузить доступное программное обеспечение для вашего устройства.

Операционная система Обнаруженная операционная система

Руководства пользователя

Руководства для вашего устройства или программного обеспечения перечислены ниже.

Приложения и функции

На этой вкладке можно посмотреть доступные приложения и функции, совместимые с вашим устройством.

Встроенное ПО

Встроенное ПО — это постоянное программное обеспечение, установленное на устройстве и обеспечивающее его корректную работу. Canon может периодически выпускать обновления для этого встроенного ПО, и если обновление доступно, его можно загрузить ниже.

FAQs

На этой вкладке вы найдете ответы на часто задаваемые вопросы и другую полезную информацию, которая поможет вам в решении вопросов и проблем.

Важная информация

На этой вкладке вы найдете подборку часто задаваемых вопросов, которые, на наш взгляд, будут вам интересны.

Коды ошибок

Код ошибки или сообщение об ошибке может появиться на устройстве по различным причинам. С помощью поля поиска можно найти полезную информацию о конкретном коде ошибки, где будут указаны причина ошибки и необходимые действия по ее устранению.

Технические характеристики

Ниже приведены все технические характеристики данного продукта.

Полезные ссылки

  • Ремонт

    Поиск центров по ремонту оборудования, полезная информация по процессу ремонта

  • Переработка

    Узнайте больше о программе утилизации картриджей Canon

  • Canon ID

    Регистрация продукта и управление аккаунтом Canon ID

Canon EOS 6D Mark II Instruction Manual

  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Canon Manuals
  4. Digital Camera
  5. EOS 6D Mark II
  6. Instruction manual

  • Contents

  • Table of Contents

  • Troubleshooting

  • Bookmarks

Quick Links

E

Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be downloaded

from the Canon Web site (p.4, 596).

INSTRUCTION

www.canon.com/icpd

MANUAL

loading

Related Manuals for Canon EOS 6D Mark II

Summary of Contents for Canon EOS 6D Mark II

  • Page 1
    Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be downloaded from the Canon Web site (p.4, 596). INSTRUCTION www.canon.com/icpd MANUAL…
  • Page 2: Introduction

    Introduction The EOS 6D Mark II is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a full-frame (approx. 35.9 x 24.0 mm) CMOS sensor with approx. 26.2 effective megapixels, DIGIC 7, normal ISO speed range of ISO 100 — ISO 40000 (for still photos), high-precision and high-speed 45-point AF (up to 45 cross-type points), maximum continuous shooting speed of approx.

  • Page 3: Item Check List

    Be careful not to lose any of the above items. For items sold separately, see the System Map (p.514). When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon Web site (p.4). The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually.

  • Page 4: Instruction Manuals

    Canon Web site to your computer or the like. Downloading the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files) The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon Web site to your computer or the like. Instruction Manual (PDF files) download site: •…

  • Page 5: Compatible Cards

    The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded to your smartphone or tablet using the QR code. www.canon.com/icpd A software application is required to read out the QR code. Select your country or region of residence, then download the Instruction Manuals.

  • Page 6: Quick Start Guide

    Quick Start Guide Insert the battery (p.42) Upon purchase, charge the battery to start using (p.40). Insert the card (p.43) With the card’s label facing toward the back of the camera, insert it into the card slot. Attach the lens (p.53) Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the…

  • Page 7
    Quick Start Guide Flip out the LCD monitor (p.46) When the LCD monitor displays the date/time/zone setting screen, see page 49. Focus on the subject (p.56) Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject. Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject.
  • Page 8: Conventions Used In This Manual

    Conventions Used in this Manual Icons in this Manual <6> : Indicates the Main Dial. <5> : Indicates the Quick Control Dial. <9> : Indicates the Multi-controller. <W><X><Y><Z> : Indicates the direction of the shift or move when the key on the Multi-controller is pressed. <0>…

  • Page 9: Chapters

    Chapters Introduction Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations Basic Shooting Setting the AF and Drive Modes Image Settings GPS Settings Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects Flash Photography Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) Shooting Movies Image Playback Post-Processing Images Sensor cleaning Print Order and Photobook Set-up Customizing the Camera…

  • Page 10: Table Of Contents

    Contents Introduction Item Check List…………….. 3 Instruction Manuals …………….4 Compatible Cards…………….5 Quick Start Guide …………….6 Conventions Used in this Manual…………. 8 Chapters………………. 9 Index to Features …………….18 Safety Precautions …………….. 22 Handling Precautions …………..25 Nomenclature …………….. 28 Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations Charging the Battery …………..

  • Page 11
    Contents Formatting the Card …………….70 Before You Start …………….73 Disabling the Beeper …………..73 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off……..73 Setting the Image Review Time ………..74 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On ……….74 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings……75 l Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder ……..
  • Page 12
    Contents 8: r Panning……………..114 8: 4 Shooting Close-ups …………116 8: P Shooting Food…………..117 8: y Shooting Candlelight Portraits ……..118 8: 6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ……119 8: F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld) ……. 120 8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes ……….121 Q Quick Control …………….
  • Page 13
    Contents Customizing a Picture Style …………180 Registering a Picture Style…………183 B: Setting the White Balance…………185 u White Balance Correction …………191 Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast ……… 194 Setting Noise Reduction ……………195 Highlight Tone Priority …………..199 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics ..
  • Page 14
    Contents a: Manual Exposure …………..241 q Selecting the Metering Mode……….243 O Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation ……245 h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)……….. 247 A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock) ……249 F: Long (Bulb) Exposures …………250 w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting ……
  • Page 15
    Contents Shooting Movies k Shooting Movies …………..326 Shooting Function Settings …………339 Setting the Movie Recording Quality……….341 Setting the Sound Recording …………346 Shooting HDR Movies…………..348 a Shooting Time-lapse Movies……….349 Shooting Video Snapshots…………361 Menu Function Settings …………..371 Image Playback x Image Playback …………..388 B: Shooting Information Display ……….391 H Index display (Multiple-image Display) ……..399…
  • Page 16
    Contents Slide Show (Auto Playback) …………424 Viewing Images on a TV Set …………427 L Erasing Images……………. 430 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ……… 434 Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images …….. 435 Post-Processing Images R Processing RAW Images with the Camera……438 S Resizing JPEG Images…………
  • Page 17
    Contents Registering My Menu …………..505 w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes……..510 Reference System Map ……………… 514 Checking the Battery Information……….516 Using a Household Power Outlet……….520 H Using Eye-Fi Cards …………..522 Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode…….526 Menu Settings …………….
  • Page 18: Index To Features

    Index to Features Power LCD monitor Charging the battery p.40 Vari-angle p.46 Battery level p.48 Touch control p.67 Checking battery Brightness p.434 information p.516 Half-press Off/On p.74 Household power outlet p.520 Electronic level p.80 Auto power off p.73 Shooting mode guide p.89 Feature guide p.90…

  • Page 19
    Index to Features Image Recording Settings Shooting Creating/Selecting a Shooting mode p.35 folder p.209 • Basic Zone modes p.35 File numbering p.211 • SCN mode p.108 • Creative Zone modes p.36 Image Quality Aspect ratio p.168 Image-recording quality p.162 HDR mode p.253 ISO speed (still photos) p.170…
  • Page 20
    Index to Features Flash Movie Shooting External flash p.278 Autoexposure shooting p.326 Flash exposure Manual exposure compensation p.278 shooting p.330 FE lock p.278 ISO speed (movie) p.372 Flash function settings p.281 AF method p.308 Flash Custom Function Movie Servo AF p.373 settings p.286…
  • Page 21
    Index to Features Playback Customization Image review time p.74 Custom Functions (C.Fn) p.469 Single-image display p.388 Custom Controls p.497 Shooting information My Menu p.505 display p.391 Custom shooting mode p.510 Index display p.399 Sensor Cleaning and Dust Image browsing Reduction (Jump display) p.400 Setting image search…
  • Page 22: Safety Precautions

    If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer from whom you purchased the product. Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or serious Warnings: injuries may result.

  • Page 23
    Safety Precautions Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or a fire. If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do not touch the exposed internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock. Do not disassemble or modify the equipment.
  • Page 24
    Safety Precautions Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury or Cautions: property damage may result. Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life of the product.
  • Page 25: Handling Precautions

    If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly consult the nearest Canon Service Center. Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor.

  • Page 26
    Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding.
  • Page 27
    Handling Precautions LCD Panel and LCD Monitor Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction.
  • Page 28: Nomenclature

    Nomenclature <R> Drive mode selection <f> AF operation/AF method selection button button (p.156, 159) (p.130, 305/308) <i> ISO speed setting <B> AF area selection button (p.136, 482) button (p.170) GPS antenna <q> Metering mode selection button (p.243) Lens mount index (p.53) Flash sync contacts <U>…

  • Page 29
    Nomenclature LCD panel (p.33, 34) <p> AF start button (p.56, 130, 292, 337) Eyecup (p.270) <A> AE lock/ FE lock button Viewfinder eyepiece (p.249, 278) <S> AF point selection button <B> Info button (p.136, 137) (p.60, 80, 84, 91, 293, 298, 334, 388) Power switch (p.47) Speaker…
  • Page 30
    Nomenclature <A> Live View shooting/ <k> Movie shooting switch (p.289/325) <0> Start/Stop button Dioptric adjustment knob (p.55) (p.290, 326) <V> Focal plane mark Access lamp (p.44) Strap mount (p.38) <u> Index/ Magnify/ Card slot Reduce button cover (p.43) (p.399/317, 321, 404) Battery Accessory positioning hole compartment…
  • Page 31
    Nomenclature Viewfinder Information Display Electronic level (p.81) Large Zone AF frame (p.140) Area AF frame (p.140) Spot metering circle (p.244) Aspect ratio line 16:9 (p.168) Focusing screen Aspect ratio line 1:1 (p.168) Grid (p.79) <S> AF point <O> Spot AF point Aspect ratio (p.139) line 4:3…
  • Page 32
    Nomenclature <i> ISO speed (p.170) <o> Focus indicator (p.94, 131) <A> AE lock (p.249) Maximum burst for AEB in-progress continuous shooting (p.167) (p.247) Number of remaining multiple exposures (p.259) <D> Flash-ready (p.278) ISO speed (p.170) Improper FE lock warning Consecutive self-timer shots (p.159) <d>…
  • Page 33: Lcd Panel

    Nomenclature LCD Panel Drive mode (p.156, 159) <A> Highlight tone priority (p.199) u Single shooting o High-speed continuous shooting <i> ISO speed (p.170) i Low-speed continuous shooting B Silent single shooting ISO speed (p.170) M Silent continuous shooting Consecutive self-timer shots Q Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control (p.159) k Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control…

  • Page 34
    Nomenclature <P> Multiple-exposure shooting <a> Time-lapse movie shooting (p.349) (p.258) <s> Bluetooth function <H> Bulb timer shooting/ Interval timer shooting <z> Warning icon (p.251/267) (p.489) <l> Wi-Fi function <r> GPS acquisition status Battery level (p.48) <x> Logging function <O> Exposure compensation Exposure level indicator (p.245) Exposure compensation amount…
  • Page 35: Shooting Mode

    Nomenclature Mode Dial You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button). Basic Zone All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the subject or scene for shooting.

  • Page 36
    Nomenclature Creative Zone These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects as desired. d : Program AE (p.234) s : Shutter-priority AE (p.236) f : Aperture-priority AE (p.238) a : Manual exposure (p.241) F : Bulb (p.250) Custom shooting mode You can register the shooting mode (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F>), AF operation, menu settings, etc.
  • Page 37
    Nomenclature Battery Charger LC-E6 Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40). Power plug Battery pack slot Charge lamp IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
  • Page 38: Attaching The Strap

    Nomenclature Attaching the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.

  • Page 39: Getting Started And Basic Camera Operations

    Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera operations.

  • Page 40: Charging The Battery

    Charging the Battery Remove the protective cover. Detach the protective cover provided with the battery. Attach the battery. As shown in the illustration, attach the battery securely to the charger. To detach the battery, follow the above procedure in reverse. Recharge the battery.

  • Page 41
    Charging the Battery Tips for Using the Battery and Charger Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged. Charge the battery before use. Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used. Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity. After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet.
  • Page 42: Installing And Removing The Battery

    Installing and Removing the Battery Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera. The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and darkens when the battery is removed. If the battery is not installed, the image in the viewfinder becomes blurred and you cannot perform focusing.

  • Page 43: Installing And Removing The Card

    Installing and Removing the Card You can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold separately) with the camera. The captured images are recorded onto the card. Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable writing and erasing. Installing the Card Open the cover.

  • Page 44: Removing The Card

    Installing and Removing the Card Removing the Card Open the cover. Set the power switch to <2>. Check that the access lamp is off, then open the cover. If [Recording…] is displayed on the LCD monitor, close the cover. Access lamp Remove the card.

  • Page 45
    Installing and Removing the Card When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking.
  • Page 46: Using The Lcd Monitor

    Using the LCD Monitor After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live View shooting, shoot movies, or play back photos and movies. You can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor. Flip out the LCD monitor. Rotate the LCD monitor.

  • Page 47: Turning On The Power

    Turning on the Power If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen appears, see page 49 to set the date/time/zone. <1> : The camera turns on. <2> : The camera is turned off and does not function. Set the power switch to this position when not using the camera.

  • Page 48: Battery Level

    Turning on the Power z Battery Level Indicator When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon < > indicates that the battery will soon be exhausted. Display Level (%) 100 — 70…

  • Page 49: Setting The Date, Time, And Zone

    Setting the Date, Time, and Zone When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps below to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time zone in which you currently live so that when you travel, you can simply change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the camera will automatically adjust the date/ time.

  • Page 50
    3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Zone], then press <0>. Press the <W> <X> keys to select the time zone, then press <0>. If your desired time zone is not listed, press the <M> button, then proceed to the next step to set it (with the time difference from the Coordinated Universal Time, UTC).
  • Page 51
    3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone Set the daylight saving time. Set it as necessary. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Y]. Press <0> so <r> is displayed. Press the <W> <X> keys to select [Z], then press <0>. When the daylight saving time is set to [Z], the time set in step 4 will advance by 1 hr.
  • Page 52: Selecting The Interface Language

    Selecting the Interface Language Display the menu screen. Press the <M> button to display the menu screen. Under the [52] tab, select [LanguageK]. Press the <Q> button and select the [5] tab. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the [52] tab. Press the <W>…

  • Page 53: Attaching And Detaching A Lens

    Attaching and Detaching a Lens The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses. Attaching a Lens Remove the caps. Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows.

  • Page 54: Detaching

    Attaching and Detaching a Lens Detaching the Lens While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow. Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens. Do not look at the sun directly through any lens.

  • Page 55: Basic Shooting Operations

    Basic Shooting Operations Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity Turn the dioptric adjustment knob. Turn the knob left or right so that the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp. If the knob is difficult to turn, remove the eyecup (p.270). If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is recommended.

  • Page 56: Shutter Button

    Basic Shooting Operations Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely. Pressing Halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture.

  • Page 57: Mode Dial

    Basic Shooting Operations Mode Dial Turn the dial while holding down the lock release button at the center of the dial. Use it to set the shooting mode. Main Dial After pressing a button, turn the <6> dial. When you press a button such as <f>, <R>, <i>, or <q>, the respective function remains selectable for approx.

  • Page 58
    Basic Shooting Operations Quick Control Dial After pressing a button, turn the <5> dial. When you press a button such as <f>, <i>, or <q>, the respective function remains selectable for approx. 6 sec. (9). During this time, you can turn the <5>…
  • Page 59
    Basic Shooting Operations Multi-controller The <9> consists of an eight-direction key. Use it to select the AF point, correct the white balance, move the AF point or magnifying frame during Live View shooting or movie shooting, set the Quick Control, etc. You can also use it to select menu items.
  • Page 60: Lcd Panel Illumination

    Basic Shooting Operations U LCD Panel Illumination You can illuminate the LCD panel by pressing the <U> button. Turn on (9) or off the LCD panel illumination by pressing the <U> button. During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off the LCD panel illumination.

  • Page 61: Q Quick Control For Shooting Functions

    Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor with intuitive operations. This is called Quick Control. Press the <Q> button The Quick Control screen will appear. Set the desired functions. Press the <W>…

  • Page 62
    Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions Functions Settable with the Quick Control Creative Zone modes Aperture (p.238) Shutter speed (p.236) Flash exposure compensation (p.278, 285) Exposure compensation/ ISO speed (p.170) AEB setting Wi-Fi function (p.245/247) Picture Style (p.176) Custom Controls (p.497) Image-recording quality AF operation (p.130) (p.162)
  • Page 63: Quick Control

    Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions Quick Control Select the desired function and press <0>. The function setting screen will appear. Turn the <6> or <5> dial, then press the <Y> <Z> keys to change the setting. There are also functions that are set by pressing a button <0>…

  • Page 64: Menu Operations And Configurations

    Menu Operations and Configurations You can configure various settings with the menus such as the image- recording quality, date/time, etc. <M> button <Q> button <6> Main Dial LCD monitor <5> Quick Control Dial Multi-controller <0> button <W><X><Y><Z> keys Basic Zone Modes Menu Screen * In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and menu items do not appear.

  • Page 65
    3 Menu Operations and Configurations Menu Setting Procedure Display the menu screen. Press the <M> button to display the menu screen. Select a tab. Each time you press the <Q> button, the main tab (group of functions) will switch. Press the Multi-controller’s <Y> <Z>…
  • Page 66
    3 Menu Operations and Configurations The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen. You can also tap on the menu screen or turn the <6> or <5> dial to operate the menu.
  • Page 67: Operating The Camera With Touch Screen

    d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen You can operate the camera by tapping on the LCD monitor (touch- sensitive panel) with your fingers. Sample Screen (Quick Control) Use your finger to tap on (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the LCD monitor.

  • Page 68: The Screen

    d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen Drag Sample Screen (Menu screen) Slide your finger while touching the LCD monitor. Sample Screen (Scale display) Examples of operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button Setting with scale display Quick Control Selecting AF points (except with Live View shooting)

  • Page 69
    d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen 3 Setting the Touch Control Response Select [Touch control]. Under the [54] tab, select [Touch control], then press <0>. Set the touch control response setting. Select the desired setting, then press <0>. [Standard] is the normal setting. [Sensitive] provides a more reactive touch screen response than [Standard].
  • Page 70: Formatting The Card

    Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera. When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep.

  • Page 71
    3 Formatting the Card Format the card in the following cases: The card is new. The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer. The card is full of images or data. A card-related error is displayed (p.567). Low-level Formatting Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
  • Page 72
    3 Formatting the Card If you format an SDXC card with this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and the card may become unusable. Certain computer operating systems or card readers may not recognize a card formatted in exFAT.
  • Page 73: Before You Start

    Before You Start 3 Disabling the Beeper You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved, during self-timer shooting, and during touch operations. Select [Beep]. Under the [54] tab, select [Beep], then press <0>. Select [Disable]. Select [Disable], then press <0>. The beeper will not sound.

  • Page 74: Setting The Image Review Time

    Before You Start 3 Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set [Hold]. To not have the captured image displayed, set [Off]. Select [Image review].

  • Page 75: Reverting The Camera To The Default Settings

    Before You Start 3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be reverted to their defaults. Select [Clear all camera settings]. Under the [55] tab, select [Clear all camera settings], then press <0>. Select [OK].

  • Page 76
    Before You Start Shooting Function Settings Image Recording Settings AF operation One-Shot AF Image quality Automatic AF area selection Aspect ratio selection AF mode Picture Style Auto Disable after One- Lens electronic Auto Lighting Standard Shot AF Optimizer q (Evaluative Lens aberration correction Metering mode metering)
  • Page 77
    Before You Start Camera Settings Live View Shooting Settings Image review time 2 sec. Live View shooting Enable One-Shot AF Release shutter AF operation Enable without card AF method u+Tracking Image jump w/6 e (10 images) Touch Shutter Disable Disable 8 sec.
  • Page 78
    Before You Start Movie Shooting Settings Movie Servo AF Enable Movie recording NTSC:L6X PAL:L5X size AF method u+Tracking Sound recording Auto Movie Servo AF track sensitivity Wind filter Auto Disable Attenuator Movie Servo AF Speed kISO speed settings When active Always on ISO speed Auto…
  • Page 79: Displaying The Grid In The Viewfinder

    Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt or compose the shot. Select [Viewfinder display]. Under the [52] tab, select [Viewfinder display], then press <0>. Select [Grid display]. Select [Show].

  • Page 80: Q Displaying The Electronic Level

    Displaying the Electronic Level You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt. Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor Press the <B> button. Each time you press the <B> button, the screen display will change.

  • Page 81: Electronic Level

    3 Displaying the Electronic Level 3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder. Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can take the picture while checking the camera tilt. Select [Viewfinder display].

  • Page 82: Setting The Viewfinder Information Display

    Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN The shooting function settings (Battery level, Shooting mode, AF operation, Image quality (image type), Drive mode, Metering mode, Flicker detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder. By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X]. Select [Viewfinder display]. Under the [52] tab, select [Viewfinder display], then press <0>.

  • Page 83
    3 Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality (image type: JPEG/RAW) will not be displayed. Regardless of whether it is checkmarked, the respective information will appear in the viewfinder in the following cases: when you change the shooting mode, when you press the <f>, <R>, or <q>…
  • Page 84: B Button Functions

    B Button Functions During viewfinder shooting, when you press the <B> button with the camera being ready to shoot, you can toggle the display between the electronic level (p.80) and Quick Control screen (p.86). [z button display options] under the [54] tab enables you to select the options displayed when the <B>…

  • Page 85
    B Button Functions If you turn off the power with the electronic level or Quick Control screen displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power again. To cancel this function, press the <B> button a number of times until the screen is blank, then turn off the power switch.
  • Page 86: Quick Control Screen

    B Button Functions Quick Control Screen AE lock Aperture Shutter speed Highlight tone priority ISO speed Shooting modes Exposure level Flash exposure indicator compensation Exposure compensation Wi-Fi function White balance Custom Controls correction Image-recording Picture Style quality AF operation Possible shots/ Quick Control icon Auto cleaning Battery level…

  • Page 87
    B Button Functions Button Operations with Quick Control Screen Displayed When you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, <q>, <S>, or <B> button, the setting screen appears and you can set it with <6>, <5>, <9>, or <B> button. AF operation Drive mode ISO speed Metering mode…
  • Page 88: R Setting The Multi Function Lock

    R Setting the Multi Function Lock By setting the <R> switch upward, you can prevent the settings from being changed by accidentally operating the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, or Multi-controller or by inadvertently tapping on the touch screen. For details on the Multi function lock switch, see page 59. Select [Multi function lock].

  • Page 89: Setting The Shooting Mode Guide

    Setting the Shooting Mode Guide When you turn the Mode Dial to select a shooting mode, a brief description (shooting mode guide) of the shooting mode can be displayed on the screen. During viewfinder shooting, the mode guide appears when the Quick Control screen or electronic level is displayed. By default, it is set to [Enable].

  • Page 90: Setting The Feature Guide

    Setting the Feature Guide When using Quick Control, a brief description (feature guide) of the selected function can be displayed. The Feature guide can be displayed during viewfinder shooting, Live View shooting, and movie shooting. By default, it is set to [Enable]. Select [Feature guide].

  • Page 91: Help

    Help When [zHelp] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. Press the <B> button to display the Help. Press it again to turn off the Help display. If the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. In such a case, press <W>…

  • Page 92
    Help Help Display Text Size You can select the text size for the Help display. By default, it is set to [Small]. Select [Help text size]. Under the [53] tab, select [Help text size], then press <0>. Set the text size. Select [Small] or [Standard], then press <0>.
  • Page 93: Basic Shooting

    Basic Shooting This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results. With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the camera sets everything automatically (p.127, 526). Also, because advanced shooting function settings cannot be changed, you can enjoy shooting photographs without worrying about botched pictures due to misoperation.

  • Page 94: A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

    A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) <A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject (p.97).

  • Page 95
    A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) Take the picture. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. The captured image will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor. The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
  • Page 96
    The shutter speed display is blinking. Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite (sold separately, p.278) is recommended. When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark.
  • Page 97: A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

    A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective. In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject.

  • Page 98: A Live View Shooting

    A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) A Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 289. Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <A>. Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor.

  • Page 99
    A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) You can also rotate the LCD monitor to shoot at different angles. For details, see page 46. Normal angle Low angle High angle…
  • Page 100: C Creative Auto Shooting

    C Creative Auto Shooting <C> is a fully-automatic shooting mode that is a step more advanced from <A>. You can first adjust the photo’s ambience, background blur, etc. before shooting. By pressing the <Q> button, you can set 1. Ambience-based shots, 2. Background blur setting, 3.

  • Page 101
    C Creative Auto Shooting (1) Ambience-based shots (4) AF point selection (2) Background blur Possible shots Battery level Image-recording quality (3) Drive mode (1) Ambience-based shots You can select and shoot with the ambience you want to convey in your images.
  • Page 102
    C Creative Auto Shooting Ambience Settings gAmbience: Standard This provides standard image characteristics. h Vivid The subject looks crisp, sharp and vivid. Effective for making the picture look more impressive than with [g Ambience: Standard]. i Soft The subject is less defined, giving the picture a softer and daintier look.
  • Page 103
    C Creative Auto Shooting (2) Background blur You can adjust the degree of background blur. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the effect. With the (2) item on page 101 selected, press <0> to display the screen shown on the left.
  • Page 104
    C Creative Auto Shooting (3) Drive mode You can select single shooting, continuous shooting, or self-timer. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the desired mode. Pressing <0> will display the screen shown on the left. Turn the <6> dial to select the desired setting.
  • Page 105
    C Creative Auto Shooting Using Effect Preview in Live View Shooting In the <C> mode, when you set the [Ambience-based shots] or [Background blur], shooting while checking the resulting effect on the Live View image is recommended. Display the Live View image. Set the Live View/Movie shooting switch to <A>, then press the <0>…
  • Page 106
    C Creative Auto Shooting Set [Background Blur]. Press the <Q> button to exit the Quick Control. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to adjust the blur while checking it on the screen (p.103). While you adjust it, [Simulating blur] will be displayed. Take the picture.
  • Page 107: 8: Special Scene Mode

    8: Special Scene Mode The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene. * <8> stands for Special Scene. Set the Mode Dial to <8>. Press the <Q> button The Quick Control screen will appear. Select [Choose scene].

  • Page 108: Scn Mode

    8: Special Scene Mode SCN Modes 2: Portrait (p.109) q: Group Photo 3: Landscape (p.111) (p.110) 5: Sports (p.112) C: Kids (p.113) r: Panning (p.114) 4: Close-up (p.116) y: Candlelight (p.118) P: Food (p.117) G: HDR Backlight F: Handheld Night 6: Night Portrait Control (p.121) (p.119)

  • Page 109: 8: 2 Shooting Portraits

    8: 2 Shooting Portraits The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer. Shooting Tips Select the location where the distance between the subject and the background is the farthest. The further the distance between the subject and background, the more blurred the background will look.

  • Page 110: 8: Q Shooting Group Photos

    8: q Shooting Group Photos Use the <q> (Group Photo) mode to shoot group photos. You can take a picture in which both the people in the front and people in the back are all in focus. Shooting Tips Use a wide-angle lens. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to make it easy to get all the people in the group in focus at once, from the front row to the back.

  • Page 111: 8: 3 Shooting Landscapes

    8: 3 Shooting Landscapes Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Shooting Tips With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end. When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the objects near and far in focus.

  • Page 112: 8: 5 Shooting Moving Subjects

    8: 5 Shooting Moving Subjects Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running person or a moving vehicle. Shooting Tips Use a telephoto lens. Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a distance.

  • Page 113: 8: C Photographing Children

    8: C Photographing Children To photograph the children running around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy. Shooting Tips Track the subject with the Area AF frame. After aiming the Area AF frame over the subject, press the shutter button halfway to start focusing.

  • Page 114: 8: R Panning

    8: r Panning If you want to take a picture with the feel of speed and a blurred motion effect on the subject’s background, use <r> (Panning). With Live View shooting, if you use a lens supporting the <r> mode, subject blur is detected, corrected, and reduced.

  • Page 115
    [Effect] to [Med] or [Min] to reduce the blur. See the cautions on page 122. To see which lenses support the <r> mode, refer to the Canon Web site. When using a lens supporting the <r> mode during Live View shooting, subject blur can be corrected and the shutter speed will be set automatically according to the setting of [Effect], regardless of the lens’s…
  • Page 116: 8: 4 Shooting Close-Ups

    8: 4 Shooting Close-ups When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro lens (sold separately). Shooting Tips Use a simple background. A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out better.

  • Page 117: 8: P Shooting Food

    8: P Shooting Food When you want to take pictures of food, use <P> (Food). The photo will look bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.

  • Page 118: 8: Y Shooting Candlelight Portraits

    8: y Shooting Candlelight Portraits When you want to photograph a person in candlelight, use <y> (Candlelight). The atmosphere of candlelight is reflected in the color tones of the picture. Shooting Tips Use the center AF point to focus. Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder on the subject, then shoot. Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in the viewfinder blinks.

  • Page 119: 8: 6 Shooting Night Portraits (With A Tripod)

    8: 6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural- looking night scene in the background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Note that an external Speedlite is required for shooting. Using a tripod is recommended.

  • Page 120: 8: F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)

    8: F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld) Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results. However, the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes even while handholding the camera. In this shooting mode, four shots are taken consecutively for each picture, and the resulting one image with reduced camera shake is recorded.

  • Page 121: 8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes

    8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the <G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this mode, three consecutive shots are taken at different exposures. This results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the clipped shadows caused by backlighting.

  • Page 122
    Cautions for the <8> Modes • <q> Group Photo Since distortion correction is applied, the camera records an image area narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.) Also, during Live View shooting, the angle of view changes slightly.
  • Page 123
    • <r> Panning (continued) If the lens does not support the <r> mode, subject blur will not be corrected. However, the automatic shutter speed adjustment alone will take effect according to the setting of [Effect]. When shooting under bright light such as a sunny summer day or when shooting a slow subject, the set degree of panning effect may not be obtained.
  • Page 124
    • <6> Night Portrait Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires. During Live View shooting, achieving focus may be difficult when the face of the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>…
  • Page 125
    • <F> Handheld Night Scene (continued) If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark. The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due to camera shake.
  • Page 126: Q Quick Control

    Q Quick Control In Basic Zone modes, pressing the <Q> button sets the items shown in the tables on the next page with the Quick Control. Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode. Press the <Q> button Example: < A > mode The Quick Control screen will appear.

  • Page 127
    Q Quick Control Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes o: Default setting : User selectable : Not selectable Function Ambience-based shots (p.101) Background blur (p.103) Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Drive Silent single shooting mode Silent continuous shooting (p.156) 10-sec.
  • Page 128
    Q Quick Control o: Default setting : User selectable : Not selectable Function Color tone (p.106) Brightness (p.106) Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Drive Silent single shooting mode Silent continuous shooting (p.156) 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous shooting AF point selection (p.136, 137) *1: If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the…
  • Page 129: Setting The Af And Drive Modes

    Setting the AF and Drive Modes The AF points in the viewfinder are arranged to make AF shooting suitable for a wide variety of subjects and scenes. You can also select the AF operation and drive mode that best match the shooting conditions and subject. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>).

  • Page 130: F: Selecting The Af Operation

    f: Selecting the AF OperationN You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode. Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF>.

  • Page 131
    f: Selecting the AF OperationN One-Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. The AF point that achieves focus is displayed, and the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will also light AF point With the camera in the default Focus indicator…
  • Page 132: Ai Servo Af For Moving Subjects

    f: Selecting the AF OperationN AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.

  • Page 133
    f: Selecting the AF OperationN AF Points Lighting Up in Red By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low- light conditions or on a dark subject. In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved (p.488).
  • Page 134: S Selecting The Af Area And Af Point

    S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point The camera has 45 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject. Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc.

  • Page 135
    S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point G Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone) The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right) for focusing. H Automatic selection AF The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus.
  • Page 136
    S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode Press the <S> or <B> button Look through the viewfinder and press the <S> or <B> button. Press the <B> button. Each time you press the <B> button, the AF area selection mode changes.
  • Page 137: Af Point Selection

    S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point Selecting the AF Point Manually You can manually select the AF point or zone. Press the <S> or <B> button The AF points will be displayed in the viewfinder. In the Zone AF mode or Large Zone AF mode, the selected zone will be displayed.

  • Page 138
    S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point AF Point Display Indications Pressing the <S> or <B> button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see pages 143-148.
  • Page 139: Af Area Selection Mode

    AF Area Selection Mode Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection) For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than with Single-point AF. Select one AF point < > to focus. Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing on overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage. Since Single-point Spot AF covers a very small area, focusing may be difficult during handheld or low-light shooting or for a moving subject.

  • Page 140
    AF Area Selection Mode Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone) The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right) for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all the AF points in the selected zone are used for Automatic selection AF, it is superior to Single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is effective for moving subjects.
  • Page 141
    AF Area Selection Mode When AI Servo AF mode is set for Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF, the active AF point <r> will keep switching to track the subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.
  • Page 142: Color Tracking

    AF Area Selection Mode AF Using Color Tracking With the camera in its default state, if the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF (Manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone), or Auto selection AF, color tracking AF detecting colors comparable to human skin tones will be performed (except in <8: 3r4Py6F>…

  • Page 143: Af Sensor

    AF Sensor The camera’s AF sensor has 45 AF points. The illustration below shows the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is possible at the viewfinder center. Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc.

  • Page 144
    AF Sensor This focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision focusing for lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on the subjects that may be difficult to focus. It is provided at the center AF point. These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some supporting f/8).
  • Page 145: Lenses And Usable Af Points

    AF points will stay lit.) Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points, see page 138. Regarding new lenses released after the EOS 6D Mark II (in the second half of 2017), check the Canon Web site to see which group they belong Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.

  • Page 146
    Lenses and Usable AF Points Group B Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable. : Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking performance is superior and high-precision focusing is achieved. Group C Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.
  • Page 147
    Lenses and Usable AF Points Group E Autofocusing with the 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.
  • Page 148
    Lenses and Usable AF Points Group G Autofocusing with 27 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF points.) Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be selected in AF area selection mode. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.
  • Page 149: Lens Group

    Lenses and Usable AF Points Lens Group Designations EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM EF14mm f/2.8L USM EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM EF14mm f/2.8L II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye EF200mm f/1.8L USM EF20mm f/2.8 USM EF200mm f/1.8L USM EF24mm f/1.4L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF24mm f/1.4L II USM EF200mm f/1.8L USM…

  • Page 150
    Lenses and Usable AF Points EF300mm f/4L IS USM EF500mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8) EF300mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF500mm f/4.5L USM EF300mm f/4L IS USM EF500mm f/4.5L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8) + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)*…
  • Page 151
    Lenses and Usable AF Points EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 + Extender EF2x I/II/III EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM…
  • Page 152
    Lenses and Usable AF Points EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x EF100-200mm f/4.5A EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM Extender 1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B EF100-300mm f/5.6 EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM EF100-300mm f/5.6L Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III…
  • Page 153: When Autofocus Fails

    When Autofocus Fails Autofocus may fail to achieve focus (focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder blinks) with special subjects such as the following: Subjects Difficult to Focus on Subjects with very low contrast (Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.) Subjects in very low light Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)

  • Page 154: Mf: Manual Focus

    MF: Manual Focus If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, follow the procedure below to focus manually. Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>. <4 L> will be displayed on the LCD panel. Focus on the subject. Focusing ring Turn the lens focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder.

  • Page 155: Setting Lens Electronic Mf

    Setting Lens Electronic MFN With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you can set whether to use electronic manual focusing after autofocusing in One-Shot AF mode. The default setting is [Disable after One-Shot AF]. EF50mm f/1.0L USM EF300mm f/2.8L USM EF600mm f/4L USM EF85mm f/1.2L USM…

  • Page 156: Selecting The Drive Mode

    i Selecting the Drive Mode Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject. Press the <R> button Select the drive mode. While looking at the LCD panel or in the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial. u : Single shooting When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.

  • Page 157
    i Selecting the Drive Mode i : Low-speed continuous shooting While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. (except the <r> mode). Note that during Live View shooting, if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], subject tracking is given priority (Subject-tracking priority) at a continuous shooting speed of max.
  • Page 158
    i Selecting the Drive Mode The approx. 6.5 shots/sec. maximum high-speed continuous shooting speed <o> (p.156) is achieved under the following conditions: Fully charged battery pack, 1/500 sec. or faster shutter speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), flicker reduction disabled, and Live View shooting with One-Shot AF*.
  • Page 159: Using The Self-Timer

    j Using the Self-timer Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph. Press the <R> button Select the self-timer. While looking at the LCD panel or in the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial. Q : Shoot in 10 sec.

  • Page 160
    j Using the Self-timer If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.270). If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure. With <q>, the interval between multiple shots may be prolonged depending on shooting conditions such as the image-recording quality and external flash use.
  • Page 161: Image Settings

    Image Settings This chapter describes image-related functions: Image- recording quality, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, white balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction, highlight tone priority, lens aberration correction, anti- flicker shooting, and other functions. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>).

  • Page 162: Setting The Image-Recording Quality

    Setting the Image-Recording Quality You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Seven JPEG quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, and b. Three RAW image-recording quality settings are provided: 1, 41, and 61 (p.166). Select [Image quality].

  • Page 163
    3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality Image-recording Quality Setting Examples 73 only 1 only 1+73 61+74…
  • Page 164
    3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.) Maximum Burst Image Pixels Print File Size Possible High Quality Recorded Size (MB) Shots Standard Speed JPEG 1000 1950 1870 3570 2820 6.5M 5310 3.8M 4170 32.6 25.3 6.5M 17.4 RAW+JPEG 32.6 + 7.5…
  • Page 165
    3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an 8 GB card. The maximum burst during continuous shooting is based on Canon’s standard testing SD card (Standard: 8 GB, High-speed: UHS-I 16 GB) and testing standards (<o>…
  • Page 166: Raw Images

    Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon Web site to update it (p.596). (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with…

  • Page 167: Maximum Burst

    3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting The approximate maximum burst is displayed at the bottom right of the viewfinder and Quick Control screen. If the maximum burst for continuous shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be displayed.

  • Page 168: Setting The Aspect Ratio

    Setting the Aspect RatioN You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [3:2] is set by default. When [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] is set, frame lines indicating the image area will be displayed in the viewfinder. During Live View shooting, the image appears with the surrounding area masked in black on the LCD monitor.

  • Page 169
    3 Setting the Aspect RatioN Aspect Ratio 16:9 With viewfinder shooting With Live View shooting Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.) Image Quality 16:9 6240×4160 5536×4160* 6240×3504* 4160×4160 (26.0 megapixels) (23.0 megapixels) (21.9 megapixels) (17.3 megapixels) 4160×2768* 3680×2768* 4160×2336* 2768×2768 (11.5 megapixels) (10.2 megapixels) (9.7 megapixels)
  • Page 170: I: Setting The Iso Speed For Still Photos

    i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set automatically (p.172). Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 327 and 331.

  • Page 171
    i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN As H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower compared with the standard setting.
  • Page 172: Iso Auto

    i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN ISO Auto If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway. As indicated below, the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode.

  • Page 173
    i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN 3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
  • Page 174
    i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN 3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100 — ISO 40000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 — ISO 25600, and the maximum limit within ISO 200 — ISO 40000.
  • Page 175
    i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN 3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set. This is effective in the <d>…
  • Page 176: Selecting A Picture Style

    Selecting a Picture StyleN Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject. In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically. Select [Picture Style]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture Style], then press <0>.

  • Page 177
    3 Selecting a Picture StyleN Picture Style Characteristics D Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
  • Page 178
    3 Selecting a Picture StyleN U Faithful Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
  • Page 179
    3 Selecting a Picture StyleN Symbols The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters. The numerals indicate the values for these parameters set for the respective Picture Style. Symbols Sharpness Strength…
  • Page 180: Customizing A Picture Style

    Customizing a Picture StyleN You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take test shots.

  • Page 181
    3 Customizing a Picture StyleN Set the parameter. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust the parameter, then press <0>. Press the <M> button to save the adjusted parameter settings. The Picture Style selection screen will reappear. The value of parameter settings different from the default will be displayed in blue.
  • Page 182
    3 Customizing a Picture StyleN V Monochrome Adjustment Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as [Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect]. kFilter effect With a filter effect applied to a monochrome image, you can make white clouds or green trees stand out more.
  • Page 183: Registering A Picture Style

    Registering a Picture StyleN You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when you want to preset multiple Picture Styles with different settings.

  • Page 184
    3 Registering a Picture StyleN Select a parameter. Select the parameter (such as [Strength] under [Sharpness]) to be set, then press <0>. Set the parameter. Adjust the effect level of the parameter, then press <0>. For details, see “Customizing a Picture Style”…
  • Page 185: B: Setting The White Balance

    B: Setting the White BalanceN White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

  • Page 186: White Balance

    B: Setting the White BalanceN White Balance To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white.

  • Page 187: Auto White Balance

    B: Setting the White BalanceN Q Auto White Balance With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image’s warm color cast.

  • Page 188: O Custom White Balance

    B: Setting the White BalanceN O Custom White Balance With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot. Shoot a white object.

  • Page 189
    B: Setting the White BalanceN Select [White balance]. Under the [z2] tab, select [White balance], then press <0>. Select the custom white balance. Select [ ], then press <0>. If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
  • Page 190: P Setting The Color Temperature

    B: Setting the White BalanceN P Setting the Color Temperature You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is for advanced users. Select [White balance]. Under the [z2] tab, select [White balance], then press <0>. Set the color temperature. Select [P].

  • Page 191: White Balance Correction

    u White Balance CorrectionN You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels. This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who understand the use of color temperature conversion and color compensating filters and their effects.

  • Page 192: White Balance Auto Bracketing

    u White Balance CorrectionN White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias and magenta/green bias.

  • Page 193
    u White Balance CorrectionN During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower. Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the image to the card. You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing.
  • Page 194: Auto Correction Of Brightness And Contrast

    Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG images, the correction is applied when the image is captured. In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.

  • Page 195: Setting Noise Reduction

    Setting Noise ReductionN High ISO Speed Noise Reduction This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.

  • Page 196
    3 Setting Noise ReductionN Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise reduction effect may become smaller. If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.
  • Page 197: Exposures

    3 Setting Noise ReductionN Long Exposure Noise Reduction For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced. Select [Long exp. noise reduction]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Long exp.

  • Page 198
    3 Setting Noise ReductionN With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. However, even when noise reduction process is in progress, you can continue to take pictures as long as the maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder shows “1”…
  • Page 199: Highlight Tone Priority

    Highlight Tone PriorityN You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights. Select [Highlight tone priority]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Highlight tone priority], then press <0>. Select [Enable]. Highlight details are improved. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights.

  • Page 200: Correction Of Lens Aberrations Due To Optical Characteristics

    Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. Image distortion due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion.

  • Page 201: Chromatic Aberration Correction

    3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Select [Enable]. Check that [Correction data available] is displayed for the attached lens. Select [Enable], then press <0>. Take the picture. The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected. Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.

  • Page 202: Distortion Correction

    3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Distortion Correction Select [Distortion correction]. Select [Enable]. Check that [Correction data available] is displayed for the attached lens. Select [Enable], then press <0>. Take the picture. The image will be recorded with the distortion corrected.

  • Page 203
    3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Diffraction Correction Select [Diffraction correction]. Select [Enable]. Select [Enable], then press <0>. Take the picture. The image will be recorded with the diffraction corrected. Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction.
  • Page 204
    3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Lens Correction Data The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered (stored) in the camera. With [Enable] selected, the peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion correction, and diffraction correction will be applied automatically. With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594), you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera.
  • Page 205
    JPEG images already taken. When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed. If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral illumination correction and distortion correction will not be reflected in the image displayed on the screen.
  • Page 206: Reducing Flicker

    Reducing FlickerN If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result.

  • Page 207
    3 Reducing FlickerN The color tone of the captured images when [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to [Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set. Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected. Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
  • Page 208: Setting The Color Space

    Setting the Color SpaceN The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended. In Basic Zone modes, [sRGB] is set automatically. Select [Color space].

  • Page 209: Creating And Selecting A Folder

    Creating and Selecting a Folder You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved. This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images. Creating a Folder Select [Select folder]. Under the [51] tab, select [Select folder], then press <0>.

  • Page 210: Selecting A Folder

    3 Creating and Selecting a Folder Selecting a Folder Select a folder on the folder selection Lowest file number screen, then press <0>. Number of images in folder The folder where the captured images will be saved is selected. Subsequently captured images will be recorded into the selected folder.

  • Page 211: File Numbering Methods

    File Numbering Methods The captured images are assigned a IMG_0001.JPG (Example) sequential four-digit file number from 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can File number change how the file number is assigned. Select [File numbering]. Under the [51] tab, select [File numbering], then press <0>.

  • Page 212
    3 File Numbering Methods Continuous When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even after the card is replaced or a new folder is created. Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
  • Page 213: Auto Reset

    3 File Numbering Methods Auto Reset When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created. When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts from 0001 for the new images saved.

  • Page 214: Setting Copyright Information

    Setting Copyright InformationN When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information. Select [Copyright information]. Under the [55] tab, select [Copyright information], then press <0>. Select the item to be set. Select [Enter author’s name] or [Enter copyright details], then press <0>.

  • Page 215
    3 Setting Copyright InformationN Checking the Copyright Information When you select [Display copyright info.] in step 2, you can check the [Author] and [Copyright] information that you entered. Deleting the Copyright Information When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
  • Page 217: Gps Settings

    GPS Settings This chapter describes the camera’s built-in GPS settings. The EOS 6D Mark II can receive satellite navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia), and Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) “Michibiki” (Japan). The GPS function is set to [Disable] by default.

  • Page 218: Gps Features

    GPS Features Geotagging Images Geotag information* (latitude, longitude, elevation) and coordinated universal time* can be appended to images. Shooting locations of geotagged images can be displayed on a map on a computer. *1: Certain traveling conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag information to be added to images.

  • Page 219
    GPS Features Viewing Images and Information on a Virtual Map With Map Utility (EOS software, p.595), you can view the shooting locations and the route traveled on a map displayed on a computer. Map data ©2017 ZENRIN…
  • Page 220: Gps Precautions

    To avoid violating GPS function regulations, visit the Canon Web site to check where the use is allowed. Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from GPS function use in other countries and regions. Model Number…

  • Page 221: Acquiring Gps Signals

    Acquiring GPS Signals To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping your hands, etc. away from the camera top. When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera approx.

  • Page 222
    Acquiring GPS Signals GPS Acquisition Status The GPS acquisition status is indicated by the [r] icon displayed on the camera’s LCD panel. Constant r: Signal acquired Blinking r: Signal not acquired yet When you shoot while [r] is constantly displayed, the image will be geotagged.
  • Page 223
    Acquiring GPS Signals Poor GPS Coverage Under the following conditions, the GPS satellite signal will not be properly acquired. As a result, the geotag information may not be recorded or inaccurate geotag information may be recorded. Indoors, underground, in tunnels or forests, between buildings, or in valleys.
  • Page 224
    Acquiring GPS Signals Viewing GPS Information Check the [GPS] setting. Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]. Select [GPS information display]. The GPS information will be displayed. Take the picture. When you shoot after GPS signal acquisition, the image will be geotagged.
  • Page 225
    Acquiring GPS Signals Geotagging Information Play back the images and press the <B> button to display the shooting information screen (p.392). Then tilt <9> up or down to check the geotag information. Latitude Longitude Elevation UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) When you shoot a movie, the GPS information at the time when shooting begins is recorded.
  • Page 226: Setting The Positioning Interval

    Setting the Positioning Interval The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set. Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will record more accurate location information, it will reduce the number of possible shots because it will drain the battery faster. Check the [GPS] setting.

  • Page 227: Setting Time From Gps On The Camera

    Setting Time from GPS on the Camera The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set on the camera. The margin of error is approx. ±1 sec. Check the [GPS] setting. Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].

  • Page 228: Logging The Route Traveled

    Logging the Route Traveled When using the GPS logging function, the geotag information of the route the camera travels is automatically recorded in the camera’s internal memory. With Map Utility (EOS software, p.595), you can view the shooting locations and the route traveled on a map displayed on a computer.

  • Page 229
    Logging the Route Traveled Geotag Information Logs Geotag information for the route the camera travels is recorded at the intervals set with [Position update intvl] (p.226). The log data is saved in the camera’s internal memory by date. The table below shows how many days’…
  • Page 230
    Logging the Route Traveled Downloading Log Data to a Computer The log data in the camera’s internal memory can be downloaded to a computer with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) or downloaded from a card after transferring the data to the card. When you use Map Utility (EOS software, p.595) to open a log file saved on the computer, the camera’s travel route will be displayed on a map.
  • Page 231
    Logging the Route Traveled The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera body. For this reason, even when carrying the camera, such as in a bag, try to keep the top of the camera facing upwards, and do not place anything on top of it. Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible.
  • Page 233: Advanced Operations For Photographic Effects

    Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects In Creative Zone modes, you can change various settings of the camera as you desire to obtain a wide variety of shooting results, by selecting the shutter speed and/or aperture, adjusting the exposure as you prefer, etc. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>).

  • Page 234: D: Program Ae

    d: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE. * <d> stands for Program. * AE stands for Auto Exposure. Set the Mode Dial to <d>. Focus on the subject. Look through the viewfinder and aim the AF point over the subject.

  • Page 235: Program Shift

    d: Program AE If the “30″” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use flash. If the “4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number blink, it indicates overexposure. Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the lens.

  • Page 236: S: Shutter-Priority Ae

    s: Shutter-Priority AE In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.

  • Page 237
    s: Shutter-Priority AE If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed. If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <6>…
  • Page 238: F: Aperture-Priority Ae

    f: Aperture-Priority AE In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.

  • Page 239
    f: Aperture-Priority AE If the “30″” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/ number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed. If the “4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.
  • Page 240: Depth-Of-Field Preview

    f: Aperture-Priority AE Depth-of-Field PreviewN The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow (shallow). Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the depth of…

  • Page 241: A: Manual Exposure

    a: Manual Exposure In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure. * <a>…

  • Page 242
    a: Manual Exposure Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you can set exposure compensation (p.245) as follows: [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] Under [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls], with [ : Expo comp (hold btn, turn )] (p.502).
  • Page 243: Selecting The Metering Mode

    q Selecting the Metering ModeN You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness. In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically. (In the <8: y> mode, center-weighted average metering is set automatically.) Press the <q> button Select the metering mode.

  • Page 244: Spot Metering

    q Selecting the Metering ModeN Spot metering Effective when metering a specific part of the subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx. 3.2% of the viewfinder area at the center. The spot metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder. Center-weighted average metering The metering is averaged for the entire scene with the viewfinder center weighted more heavily.

  • Page 245: O Setting The Desired Exposure Compensation

    O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera. Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f> shooting modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments for viewfinder shooting, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can display the setting only up to ±3 stops.

  • Page 246
    O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN For Live View and movie shooting, the exposure compensation can be set only up to ±3 stops. If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.194) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation for a darker image is set.
  • Page 247: Auto Exposure Bracketing (Aeb)

    h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically, you can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three consecutive shots. This is called AEB. * AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing. Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

  • Page 248
    h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.194) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced. During AEB shooting, <A> will blink in the viewfinder. If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three times for each shot.
  • Page 249: A Locking The Exposure For Shooting (Ae Lock)

    A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)N You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the picture.

  • Page 250: F: Long (Bulb) Exposures

    F: Long (Bulb) Exposures In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. This photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long exposures.

  • Page 251: Bulb Timer

    F: Long (Bulb) Exposures With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated during long exposures (p.197). For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended. You can also use mirror lockup (p.265) in combination. You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately, p.276).

  • Page 252
    F: Long (Bulb) Exposures Set the desired exposure time. Select the hour, minute, or second. Press <0> so <r> is displayed. Set the desired number, then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.) Select [OK]. The set time will be displayed on the menu screen.
  • Page 253: W: Hdr (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

    w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots. With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically.

  • Page 254
    w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN Effects P: Natural For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced. A: Art standard While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting.
  • Page 255
    w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN Set [Continuous HDR]. Select either [1 shot only] or [Every shot], then press <0>. With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends. With [Every shot], HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 2 is set to [Disable HDR].
  • Page 256
    w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG image quality. The HDR mode cannot be set if RAW or RAW+JPEG is set. HDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2). HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100 — ISO 40000 (varies depending on the settings of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]).
  • Page 257
    w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], AF point display information (p.397) and Dust Delete Data (p.452) will not be appended to the image. If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be slightly lowered.
  • Page 258: P Multiple Exposures

    P Multiple ExposuresN You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. With Live View shooting (p.289), you can see in real time how the exposures are merged when you shoot multiple-exposure images. Select [Multiple exposure]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Multiple exposure], then press <0>.

  • Page 259
    P Multiple ExposuresN Set the [No. of exposures]. Select the number of exposures, then press <0>. You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures. Set [Continue Mult-exp]. Select either [1 shot only] or [Continuously], then press <0>. With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends.
  • Page 260
    P Multiple ExposuresN Shoot subsequent exposures. The captured image combining the multiple exposures will be displayed. When you perform Live View shooting, the multiple-exposure images merged so far will be displayed. By pressing the <B> button, you can display only the Live View image.
  • Page 261
    P Multiple ExposuresN For multiple-exposure shooting, the settings will be automatically switched to [Disable] for the following: all the items of [z1: Lens aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3: Highlight tone priority]. If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
  • Page 262
    P Multiple ExposuresN Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact. You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or JPEG images.
  • Page 263
    P Multiple ExposuresN You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single exposure. If you select [Deselect img], the image selection for the first image will be canceled. Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting Before you finish shooting the set number of exposures, you can press the <x>…
  • Page 264
    P Multiple ExposuresN Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality? All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41 or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved as a 1 image. Image Quality Setting Merged Multiple-Exposure JPEG JPEG 41/61…
  • Page 265: Mirror Lockup

    2 Mirror LockupN Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up before and during exposure to reduce blur caused by camera vibrations. Useful when shooting close-ups (macro photography), using a super telephoto lens, shooting at slow shutter speeds, etc.

  • Page 266
    2 Mirror LockupN Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
  • Page 267: H Interval Timer Shooting

    H Interval Timer Shooting With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval until the set number of shots are taken. Select [Interval timer]. Under the [z4] tab (the [z1] tab in Basic Zone modes), select [Interval timer], then press <0>.

  • Page 268
    H Interval Timer Shooting Select [OK]. Number of shots Shooting interval The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen. When you exit the menu, <H> will be displayed on the LCD panel. Take the picture. First shot is taken and shooting continues according to the interval timer settings.
  • Page 269
    H Interval Timer Shooting Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot when focus is not achieved.
  • Page 270: Using The Eyepiece Cover

    Using the Eyepiece Cover When you take a picture without looking through the viewfinder, such as when you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or a remote switch, stray light entering the viewfinder may cause the picture to look dark (underexposed). To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.38) attached to the camera strap.

  • Page 271: Remote Control Shooting

    Remote Control Shooting You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (with infrared control, sold separately) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (with Bluetooth, sold separately) for remote control shooting. Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately) You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/ 16.4 feet away from the camera.

  • Page 272
    Remote Control Shooting Press the remote controller’s release (transmit) button. Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control sensor, then press the release (transmit) button. The self-timer/remote control lamp Remote lights up and the picture is taken. control sensor If you select <q>…
  • Page 273: Pairing

    Remote Control Shooting Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (Sold Separately) Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) compatible with ® Bluetooth low energy technology enables remote control shooting up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. To use the BR-E1, you must first pair the camera and remote controller so they recognize each other.

  • Page 274
    Remote Control Shooting Select [Pairing]. Select [Pairing], then press <0>. Press and hold the <W> button and <T> button on the BR-E1 simultaneously for 3 sec. or more. Pairing starts. For instructions after the pairing is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s Instruction Manual.
  • Page 275
    Remote Control Shooting Canceling the Pairing To pair the camera with another Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately), clear the paring (registration) with the current remote controller. You can check the connection status of the camera and remote controller on the [Check/clear connection info] screen in step Select [Wireless communication settings].
  • Page 276: Using A Remote Switch

    Using a Remote Switch You can connect any EOS accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal such as the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (each sold separately) to shoot with the camera (p.515). To operate the accessory, refer to its Instruction Manual. Open the terminal cover.

  • Page 277: Flash Photography

    Flash Photography This chapter describes how to shoot with external EX- series Speedlites (sold separately) and how to set Speedlite settings on the camera’s menu screen.

  • Page 278: D Flash Photography

    D Flash Photography EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography easy. For operation procedures, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features of EX-series Speedlites. To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s menu screen, see pages 281-287.

  • Page 279
    If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary. Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
  • Page 280
    1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. Cautions for Live View Shooting If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z5: Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.303). The flash will not be fired if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
  • Page 281: Setting The Flash Function

    Setting the Flash FunctionN With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual.

  • Page 282
    3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in the <f> aperture- priority AE mode. : Auto The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/180 sec.
  • Page 283: Flash Function Settings

    3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Flash Function Settings The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom Function settings, etc. For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual. Sample display Wireless functions / Flash ratio control Flash zoom…

  • Page 284
    3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Wireless functions / Flash ratio control Wireless (multiple) flash photography is possible with radio or optical transmission. For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with wireless flash photography. With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.) compatible with flash function settings, you can set the flash ratio between flash…
  • Page 285
    3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Shutter synchronization Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts. If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.
  • Page 286: Settings

    3 Setting the Flash FunctionN When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is set. With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings, you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and [Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].

  • Page 287
    3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings Select [Clear settings]. Select the settings to be cleared. Select [Clear flash settings] or [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then press <0>. On the confirmation dialog, select [OK]. Then the flash settings or Custom Function settings will all be cleared.
  • Page 289: Shooting) With The Lcd Monitor

    Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”. Live View shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting/ Movie shooting switch to <A>. If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.

  • Page 290: A Shooting With The Lcd Monitor

    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <A>. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. The Live View image will be displayed in the brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.

  • Page 291
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Enabling Live View Shooting Set [z4: Live View shoot.] (under the [z1] tab in Basic Zone modes) to [Enable]. Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting (Approx. number of shots) Room Temperature Low Temperatures Temperature (23°C / 73°F) (0°C / 32°F)
  • Page 292
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. In the <8: y> mode, Live View shooting is not possible. In the <8: q>…
  • Page 293
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Information Display Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change. Maximum burst Battery level Temperature warning Possible shots/Seconds remaining on self-timer Number of remaining multiple exposures HDR shooting/ AF point (Live 1-point AF) Multiple exposures/ Multi Shot Noise Electronic level…
  • Page 294
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Warnings Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns.
  • Page 295
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Scene Icons In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. Subject Portrait Non-portrait…
  • Page 296
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor *3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed. *4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
  • Page 297
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Final Image Simulation Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image with the effects of the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and other shooting functions applied. The Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below.
  • Page 298
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor B Button Display Options You can set the information to be displayed on the image for when you press the <B> button during Live View shooting or movie shooting. Select [zbutton LV display options]. Under the [54] tab, select [zbutton LV display options], then press <0>.
  • Page 299
    A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Edit the options. Select what you want to be displayed and press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. For the information you do not want to be displayed, press <0> to remove the checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
  • Page 300: Shooting Function Settings

    Shooting Function Settings f/R/i/q Settings When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, or <q> button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the respective shooting function.

  • Page 301
    Shooting Function Settings Q Quick Control With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the <Q> button and set the following functions. In Creative Zone modes, the following can be set: AF method, AF operation, Drive mode, Metering mode, Image quality, White balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer.
  • Page 302: Menu Function Settings

    Menu Function Settings With Live View shooting, menu options exclusive to Live View shooting will appear under the [z5] tab (the [z2] tab in Basic Zone modes). The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings are disabled).

  • Page 303: Exposure Simulation

    3 Menu Function Settings Exposure simulationN Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure) of the actual image will look. • Enable (g) The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.

  • Page 304
    (regardless of the [Silent LV shoot.] setting). When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not be fired if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
  • Page 305: Selecting The Af Operation

    Selecting the AF OperationN You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode. Press the <f> button. Select the AF operation. Press the <Y>…

  • Page 306
    Selecting the AF OperationN One-Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
  • Page 307
    Selecting the AF OperationN Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously. When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
  • Page 308: Focusing With Af (Af Method)

    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Selecting the AF Method You can set the AF method to [u+Tracking] (p.309), [Smooth zone] (p.311), or [Live 1-point AF] (p.313) to suit the shooting conditions and subject. If you want to focus manually, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.321).

  • Page 309
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) u(face)+Tracking: c The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the AF point <p> also moves to track the face. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
  • Page 310
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Take the picture. Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290). Focusing on a subject other than a human face • Tap on the subject (or spot) where you want to focus. •…
  • Page 311
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Smooth Zone: o Focus can be achieved with a larger area (Zone AF frame) than the AF point of [Live 1-point AF] (p.313). Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
  • Page 312
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Take the picture. Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290). If the camera does not focus on the target subject, switch to [Live 1-point AF] (p.313) and focus again.
  • Page 313
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Live 1-point AF: d The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you want to focus on a particular subject. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
  • Page 314
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Take the picture. Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290). During movie shooting, if [z4: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF point will be displayed larger in step 1.
  • Page 315
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Notes for AF AF Operation Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation. Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
  • Page 316
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped. Subjects in low light. Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.
  • Page 317: Magnified View

    Focusing with AF (AF Method) Magnified View When the AF method is [Smooth zone] or [Live 1-point AF] mode, either press the <u> button or tap on [d] displayed on the bottom right of the screen. You can magnify the image by approx. 5x or 10x and check the focus.

  • Page 318
    Focusing with AF (AF Method) If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and perform AF. If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view, accurate focus may not be achieved. AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
  • Page 319: Shooting With The Touch Shutter

    x Shooting with the Touch Shutter Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. Enable the Touch Shutter.

  • Page 320
    x Shooting with the Touch Shutter Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or <i>, the camera will still shoot in the single shooting mode. Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus on the image with [One-Shot AF].
  • Page 321: Mf: Focusing Manually

    MF: Focusing Manually You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus). Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>. Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly. Display the magnifying frame. Press the <u> button or tap on [d] on the lower right of the screen.

  • Page 322: Manual Focusing

    MF: Focusing Manually Focus manually. While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus. After achieving focus, press the <u> button to return to the normal view. Take the picture. Check the exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290).

  • Page 323
    General Live View Shooting Cautions Image Quality When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may become noticeable. Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image. If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may deteriorate.
  • Page 324
    General Live View Shooting Cautions Live View Image Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image. Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed Live View image under low light.
  • Page 325: Shooting Movies

    Shooting Movies Movie shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting/ Movie shooting switch to <k>. Before shooting movies, see page 343 and make sure the card is able to record movies at the desired movie- recording quality setting. If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera shake can cause blurred movies.

  • Page 326: Shooting Movies

    k Shooting Movies Autoexposure Shooting When the shooting mode is set to <A>, <C>, <d>, <s>, <f>, or <F>, autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <k>. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

  • Page 327
    k Shooting Movies ISO Speed in the <A> and <C> Modes The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 — ISO 25600. ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and < > Modes The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 — ISO 25600. Under [z2: k ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO Auto] to [Max.:H2 (102400)] (p.372), the maximum limit of the automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO…
  • Page 328
    k Shooting Movies Cautions for the <A>, <C>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes In the <A> and <C> modes, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.329). You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A>…
  • Page 329
    k Shooting Movies Scene Icons In the <A> and <C> modes, the camera detects the scene type and sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. Non-Portrait Subject Background Portrait…
  • Page 330: Shooting

    k Shooting Movies Manual Exposure Shooting You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users. Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <k>. Set the Mode Dial to <a>. Set the ISO speed.

  • Page 331
    k Shooting Movies ISO Speed in the <a> Mode With [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 — ISO 25600. Under [z2:k ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO Auto] to [Max.:H2 (102400)] (p.372), the maximum limit of the automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
  • Page 332
    k Shooting Movies For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to ISO 50). When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the camera settings again before shooting movies. During movie shooting, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture. Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO speeds.
  • Page 333: Still Photo Shooting

    k Shooting Movies Settable Shutter Speeds The settable shutter speeds in the <a> manual exposure shooting mode vary depending on the frame rate of the movie recording quality. (sec.) Frame Rate Shutter Speed 1/4000 — 1/60 1/4000 — 1/50 1/4000 — 1/30 1/4000 — 1/25 The settable shutter speeds will differ for time-lapse movie shooting (p.349).

  • Page 334
    k Shooting Movies Information Display Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change. Movie shooting mode/Scene icon • : Autoexposure (A/C) • : Autoexposure (d/s/f/F) • : Manual exposure (a) • u : HDR movie shooting (8) •…
  • Page 335
    k Shooting Movies When the [z4: AF method] is [Smooth zone] or [Live 1-point AF], you can press the <B> button to display the electronic level (p.80). You can set what is displayed for when you press the <B> button (p.298).
  • Page 336
    k Shooting Movies Cautions for Movie Shooting Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
  • Page 337
    k Shooting Movies Warnings Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns.
  • Page 338
    k Shooting Movies Final Image Simulation Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look with the current settings for the Picture Style, white balance and other shooting functions applied. During movie shooting, the image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below.
  • Page 339: Shooting Function Settings

    Shooting Function Settings f/i Settings With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, if you press the <f> or <i> button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> dial to set the respective function. During manual-exposure shooting (p.330), you can press the <i>…

  • Page 340
    Shooting Function Settings Select a function and set it. Press the <W> <X> keys to select a function. The settings of the selected function and Feature guide will appear on the screen. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it. To set the white balance correction or Picture Style parameters, press the <B>…
  • Page 341: Setting The Movie Recording Quality

    Setting the Movie Recording Quality With [z1: Movie rec. size], you can set the movie recording quality (image size, frame rate, and compression method). The movie will be recorded as an MP4 file. The frame rate displayed on the [z1: Movie rec.

  • Page 342
    3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality Frame rate (fps: frame per second) 8 59.94fps/6 29.97fps For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). 7 50.00 fps/5 25.00 fps For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
  • Page 343
    3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality Cards that Can Record Movies When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a writing/reading speed (required card performance) shown in the table below or higher than the standard specification. Test the card by taking a few movies in the desired quality (p.341) and make sure the card can properly record the movie.
  • Page 344
    3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera before shooting movies is recommended (p.75). To check the card’s writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site, etc. For bit rates, see page 574. Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute Normal movie (Approx.)
  • Page 345
    3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting without interruption (except the time-lapse movie shooting). Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format it in FAT32.
  • Page 346: Setting The Sound Recording

    Setting the Sound Recording You can shoot movies while recording sound with the built-in stereo microphones or an external stereo microphone. You can also freely adjust the sound-recording level. Use [z1: Sound recording] to set sound recording functions. Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level Auto : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.

  • Page 347: Microphone

    3 Setting the Sound Recording Attenuator Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.

  • Page 348: Shooting Hdr Movies

    Shooting HDR Movies If you set the Mode Dial to <8>, you can shoot movies with clipped highlights reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even in high- contrast scenes. HDR movie will be recorded in L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL).

  • Page 349: Shooting Time-Lapse Movies

    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took.

  • Page 350: Recording Size

    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Select the desired movie recording size. Select [EnableH (3840×2160)] or [EnableL (1920×1080)]. EnableH (3840×2160) The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate of the recorded movie is 29.97fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00fps (5) for PAL, and its recording format is Motion JPEG (J) and its movie file format is MOV (D).

  • Page 351
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Set the shooting interval. Select [Interval]. Check the [k Time required] and [3: Playback time] displayed at the bottom of the screen to set the number. Select the hour, minute, or second. Time required Playback time Press <0>…
  • Page 352
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Select the exposure’s setting method. Select [Auto exposure]. Fixed 1st frame When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
  • Page 353
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Set the beeper. Select [Beep as img taken]. If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not sound for shooting. Check the settings. Time required Playback time Time required Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set interval.
  • Page 354
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Read the message. Read the message and select [OK]. Take test shots. As with Live View shooting, set the exposure and shooting functions, then press the shutter button halfway to focus. Press the shutter button completely to take test shots.
  • Page 355
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Press the <0> button. The camera will be ready to start shooting a time-lapse movie. To return to step 13, press the <0> button again. Shoot the time-lapse movie. Number of shots Press the <B> button and check again the “Time required”…
  • Page 356
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Using a tripod is recommended. Taking test shots for still photos as in step 14 and shooting test movies for time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended. Regardless of the [z1: Movie rec. size] setting, 4K time-lapse movies are recorded in H6J(NTSC)/H5J(PAL), while Full HD time-lapse movies are recorded in L 6 W(NTSC)/L 5 W(PAL).
  • Page 357
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. If the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable (sold separately), or if an HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable].
  • Page 358
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval such as when the long exposure is set, or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may not be able to shoot at the set interval. Also, shooting may not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are nearly the same.
  • Page 359
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared automatically, and the camera returns to normal movie shooting. Note that if you set a slow shutter speed for time-lapse movie shooting and the settings are automatically cleared, the shutter speed may be automatically changed to a speed within the settable range for normal movie shooting.
  • Page 360
    a Shooting Time-lapse Movies You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273) to start and stop the time- lapse movie shooting. Set [z5: Remote control] to [Disable] beforehand. With Remote Controller RC-6 Camera Status/ <o>…
  • Page 361: Shooting Video Snapshots

    Shooting Video Snapshots You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You can thereby show short and quick highlights of a trip or event.

  • Page 362
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Select [Album settings]. Select [Create a new album]. Select [Snapshot length]. Set the snapshot length. Select the desired snapshot length, then press <0>. Select [OK]. Exit the menu. Press the <M> button to exit the menu. A blue bar will appear to indicate the snapshot length.
  • Page 363
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Creating a Video Snapshot Album Shoot the first video snapshot. Press the <0> button, then shoot. The blue bar indicating the shooting duration will gradually decrease. After the set shooting duration elapses, the shooting stops automatically. The confirmation screen will appear (p.364-365).
  • Page 364
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Options in Steps 10 and 11 Function Description The movie clip will be saved as the video JSave as album (Step 10) snapshot album’s first video snapshot. The video snapshot just recorded will be added to the album recorded immediately JAdd to album (Step 11) before.
  • Page 365
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots [1 Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 10 and 11 Function Playback Description By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video 7 Play snapshot recorded immediately before. Displays the first scene of the album’s first video 5 First frame snapshot.
  • Page 366
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Adding to an Existing Album Select [Add to existing album]. Follow step 5 on page 362 to select [Add to existing album], then press <0>. Select an existing album. Turn the <5> dial to select an existing album, then press <0>.
  • Page 367
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots You can add to an album only the video snapshots with the same duration (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each). Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
  • Page 368
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Playing Back an Album You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal movie (p.419). Play back the movie. Press the <x> button to display an image. Select the album. In the single-image display, the [st] icon displayed on the upper left of the screen indicates a video…
  • Page 369
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Editing an Album After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in the album. Select [X]. On the movie playback panel displayed, select [X] (Edit), then press <0>. The editing screen will be displayed. Select an editing operation.
  • Page 370
    3 Shooting Video Snapshots Save the edited album. Press the <M> button to return to the Editing panel at the screen bottom. Select [W] (Save), then press <0>. The save screen will appear. To save it as a new album, select [New file].
  • Page 371: Menu Function Settings

    Menu Function Settings When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to <k>, some menu options under the [z1] tab will be switched to movie shooting items. Movie recording size You can set the movie recording quality (image size, frame rate, and compression method).

  • Page 372
    3 Menu Function Settings kISO speed settingsN ISO speed In the <a> mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto. You can also use the <i> button for these settings. ISO speed range For movie shooting, you can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum limits).
  • Page 373: Movie Servo Af

    3 Menu Function Settings When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z4] tab will be displayed as the menu options exclusive to movie shooting. (In Basic Zone modes, it will be the [z2] tab.) Movie Servo AF With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie shooting.

  • Page 374
    3 Menu Function Settings When [Disable] is set: Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to focus. Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable] Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult • A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera. •…
  • Page 375: Sensitivity

    3 Menu Function Settings Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivityN You can change the Movie Servo AF’s tracking sensitivity to one of seven levels. This affects the responsiveness of AF tracking sensitivity when the subject strays from the AF points, such as during panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.

  • Page 376: Movie Servo Af Speed

    * Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For details, refer to the Canon Web site. With certain lenses, even if the AF speed is adjusted, the speed may not change.

  • Page 377
    3 Menu Function Settings Metering timerN You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time). Grid display With [3×3 l] or [6×4 m], you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3×3+diag n], the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the subject.
  • Page 378
    3 Menu Function Settings V button function You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely during movie shooting. Setting Pressing halfway Pressing completely Metering and AF No function Metering only No function Metering and AF Starts/stops movie shooting Metering only Starts/stops movie shooting…
  • Page 379
    3 Menu Function Settings When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z5] tab will be displayed as the menu options exclusive to movie shooting. (In Basic Zone modes, it will be the [z3] tab.) Video snapshot You can shoot video snapshots.
  • Page 380
    (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of the Movie digital IS. When using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended. The effect of Movie digital IS will not be reflected in any magnified image.
  • Page 381: Remote Control Shooting

    3 Menu Function Settings Remote control shooting When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273). • When using Remote Controller RC-6 Set the switch to the <2> position, then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to <o>…

  • Page 382
    3 Menu Function Settings General Movie Shooting Cautions Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will appear. The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically.
  • Page 383
    3 Menu Function Settings General Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five- level indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory).
  • Page 387: Image Playback

    Image Playback This chapter describes how to play back and erase the captured images (still photos/movies), how to view them on a TV screen, and other playback-related functions. Images shot and saved with another device The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their file names changed.

  • Page 388: Image Playback

    x Image Playback Single-Image Display Play back the image. Press the <x> button. The last image captured or played back will appear. Select an image. To play back images starting with the last image captured, turn the <5> dial counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first captured image, turn the dial clockwise.

  • Page 389
    x Image Playback Exit the image playback. Press the <x> button to exit the image playback and return to shooting-ready state. When RAW images shot with [z4: Aspect ratio] set to an option other than [3:2] (p.168) are played back, frame lines indicating the image area will be displayed.
  • Page 390
    x Image Playback 3 Grid Display In the single-image display, you can overlay the grid on the image playback. With [33: Playback grid], you can select [3×3 l], [6×4 m], or [3×3+diag This function is convenient for checking the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition.
  • Page 391: B: Shooting Information Display

    B: Shooting Information Display Sample Information for Still Photos Basic information display Bluetooth function Eye-Fi transfer completed Wi-Fi function Rating Wi-Fi signal strength/ Eye-Fi transmission status Protect images Battery level Playback No./ Folder number — Total images/ File numbering Number of found images Shutter speed Image-recording…

  • Page 392
    B: Shooting Information Display Shooting information display • Detailed Information for Creative Zone Mode Images Aperture Exposure compensation amount Histogram (Brightness/RGB) Shooting date and time ISO speed Shutter speed Highlight tone priority Scroll bar Shooting mode/ Multiple exposure/ Metering mode Time-lapse movie: Test shots White balance…
  • Page 393
    B: Shooting Information Display • Detailed Information for Basic Zone Mode Images Level of the Ambience ambience effect Background blur Level of blurred motion effect Brightness Color tone * [Brightness] indicator is displayed for images whose brightness was adjusted for shooting.
  • Page 394
    B: Shooting Information Display Lens / Histogram information • Histogram (Brightness) Lens name Histogram (RGB) Focal length White balance information • Picture Style information 1 Picture Style information 2 • •…
  • Page 395: Gps Information

    B: Shooting Information Display Color space / • Noise reduction information Lens aberration • correction information GPS information • Latitude Longitude Elevation UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) The GPS information screen is not displayed when GPS information is not recorded to the images. Even if you use the camera to play back an image taken by another camera (with GPS information recorded), the GPS information will not be displayed.

  • Page 396
    B: Shooting Information Display Sample Movie Information Display Move playback/Video snapshot playback Aperture Shutter speed ISO speed Movie shooting mode/ HDR movie/ HDR movie (in 8 Movie digital IS modes)/ Time-lapse movie/ Video snapshot File size Recording time Movie recording format Movie recording size Compression rate/ Movie recording method…
  • Page 397
    B: Shooting Information Display Highlight alert When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed, clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result.
  • Page 398
    B: Shooting Information Display Histogram The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33: Histogram disp]. [Brightness] display Sample Histograms This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image’s brightness level.
  • Page 399: H Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)

    H Index display (Multiple-image Display) Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or 100 images on one screen. Press the <u> button. During image playback or when the camera is ready to shoot, press the <u>…

  • Page 400: Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)

    e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through the images forward or backward according to the jump method set. Select [Image jump w/6]. Under the [32] tab, select [Image jump w/6], then press <0>.

  • Page 401
    e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) Browse by jumping. Press the <x> button to play back images. In the single-image display, turn the <6> dial. You can browse by the set method. Jump method Playback position To search images by shooting date, select [g: Date]. To search images by folder, select [h: Folder].
  • Page 402: Filtering Images For Playback

    Filtering Images for Playback You can play back images filtered according to search conditions. After setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images. Note that the following can be done for the found images: Erase protection, rating, slide show, deletion, print order, and photobook order.

  • Page 403
    t Filtering Images for Playback Implement the search conditions. Read the message that appears. Select [OK], then press <0>. The search condition is specified. Display the found images. Press the <3> button to play back images. Only the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played back.
  • Page 404: Magnifying Images

    u Magnifying Images You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor. Magnify the image. The image can be magnified as follows: 1. During image playback, 2. During the image review after image capture, and 3. From the shooting- ready state.

  • Page 405
    u Magnifying Images 3 Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position Under the [33] tab, when you select [Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the initial magnification ratio and position for the magnified view. 1x (no magnification) The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the single-image display.
  • Page 406: Playing Back With The Touch Screen

    d Playing Back with the Touch Screen The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button to play back images. Browsing Images Swipe with one finger. With single-image display, touch the LCD monitor with one finger.

  • Page 407
    d Playing Back with the Touch Screen Reducing Image (Index Display) Pinch two fingers. Touch the screen with two fingers spread apart, and pinch your fingers together on the screen. Each time you pinch your fingers, the image will shrink. If you pinch the single-image display, it will change to the 4-image index display.
  • Page 408: Rotating The Image

    b Rotating the Image You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation. Select [Rotate image]. Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate image], then press <0>. Select an image. Turn the <5> dial to select the image to be rotated. You can also select an image in the index display (p.399).

  • Page 409: K Protecting Images

    K Protecting Images You can protect important images from being accidentally erased by the camera’s erase function. 3 Protecting a Single Image Select [Protect images]. Under the [31] tab, select [Protect images], then press <0>. Select [Select images]. An image will be displayed. Select the image to be protected.

  • Page 410
    K Protecting Images 3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at once. Select [Select range].
  • Page 411
    K Protecting Images 3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [31: Protect images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected.
  • Page 412: Setting Ratings

    p Setting Ratings You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating. 3 Rating a Single Image Select [Rating]. Under the [32] tab, select [Rating], then press <0>. Select [Select images].

  • Page 413
    p Setting Ratings 3 Rating by Specifying the Range While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once. Select [Select range]. Select [Select range] in [32: Rating], then press <0>.
  • Page 414
    p Setting Ratings 3 Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once. Under [32: Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be rated.
  • Page 415: Q Quick Control For Playback

    Q Quick Control for Playback During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following: [J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW image processing (1 images only)], [S: Resize (JPEG image only)], [N: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [ : Highlight alert], [ : AF point display], [e: Image jump w/6], [t: Image search], and [q: Send images to smartphone*].

  • Page 416
    Q Quick Control for Playback Exit the setting. Press the <Q> button to exit the Quick Control. To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.435). If [51: Auto rotate] is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
  • Page 417: Enjoying Movies

    k Enjoying Movies The three main ways to play back and enjoy movies are as follows: Playback on a TV Set (p.427) By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play back the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set.

  • Page 418
    k Enjoying Movies Playback and Editing with a Computer The movie files recorded on the card can be transferred to a computer and played back or edited with pre-installed or general-purpose software compatible with the movie’s recording format. To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use software compatible with MP4-format and MOV-format movies.
  • Page 419: Playing Back Movies

    k Playing Back Movies Play back the image. Press the <x> button to play back an image. Select a movie. Turn the <5> dial to select the movie to be played back. In the single-image display, the <s1> icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie.

  • Page 420
    k Playing Back Movies Movie Playback Panel Operation Playback Description 7 Play* Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop. Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the <5> 8 Slow motion dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen.
  • Page 421
    k Playing Back Movies Playback with the Touch Screen Tap [7] at the center of the screen. The movie will start playing back. To display the movie playback panel, tap <s1> or <st> on the upper left of the screen. To pause the movie while it is playing back, tap on the screen.
  • Page 422: Editing A Movie’s First And Last Scenes

    X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec. increments. On the movie playback screen, select [X]. The movie editing panel will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. Specify the part to be edited out.

  • Page 423
    X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes Save the edited movie. Select [W], then press <0>. The save screen will appear. To save it as a new movie, select [New file]. To save it and overwrite the original movie file, select [Overwrite], then press <0>.
  • Page 424: Slide Show (Auto Playback)

    Slide Show (Auto Playback) You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show. Specify the images to be played back. To play back all the images on the card, go to step 2. If you want to specify the images to be played back in the slide show, filter the images with [Set image search conditions] under the [32] tab…

  • Page 425: Start The Slide Show

    3 Slide Show (Auto Playback) Transition effect Background music Start the slide show. Select [Start], then press <0>. After [Loading image…] is displayed, the slide show will start. Exit the slide show. To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the <M>…

  • Page 426
    3 Slide Show (Auto Playback) Selecting the Background Music If you use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) to copy background music tracks to the card, you can play the background music together with the slide show. Select [Background music]. Set [Background music] to [On], then press <0>.
  • Page 427: Viewing Images On A Tv Set

    Viewing Images on a TV Set By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play back the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set. For the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended. If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).

  • Page 428
    Viewing Images on a TV Set When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, 4K time- lapse movies will be played back in Full HD quality (cannot be played back in 4K quality). Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera.
  • Page 429
    Viewing Images on a TV Set Press the camera’s <x> button. An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback. Select an image. Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the button to select an image.
  • Page 430: L Erasing Images

    L Erasing Images You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.409) will not be erased. Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it.

  • Page 431
    L Erasing Images 3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch By adding checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once. Select [Erase images]. Under the [31] tab, select [Erase images], then press <0>.
  • Page 432
    L Erasing Images 3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Erased While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at once. Select [Select range].
  • Page 433
    L Erasing Images 3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When [31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
  • Page 434: Adjusting The Lcd Monitor Brightness

    Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to view. Select [LCD brightness]. Under the [52] tab, select [LCD brightness], then press <0>. Adjust the brightness. Referring to the gray chart, press the <Y>…

  • Page 435: Setting The Auto Rotation Of Vertical Images

    Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images Images shot in vertical orientation are rotated automatically to the proper orientation for viewing, so they will not be displayed in horizontal orientation when played back on the camera’s LCD monitor or viewed on a computer screen. You can change the setting of this feature.

  • Page 437: Post-Processing Images

    Post-Processing Images This chapter describes RAW image processing, JPEG image resizing, and JPEG image cropping. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>). The camera may not be able to process images taken with another camera.

  • Page 438: R Processing Raw Images With The Camera

    R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.

  • Page 439
    R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN Displaying the setting screen Press <0> to display the selected function’s setting screen. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to change the setting. Press <0> to finalize the setting and return to the previous screen.
  • Page 440
    R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN Magnified View You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The magnification will vary depending on the [Image quality] setting under [x1: RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the magnified image.
  • Page 441: Brightness Adjustment

    R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN RAW Image Processing Options Brightness adjustment You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect. White balance (p.185) You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the <B>…

  • Page 442
    R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN Color space (p.208) You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set. Lens aberration correction (p.200) Peripheral illumination correction…
  • Page 443
    R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN (p.203) Diffraction correction The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.440).
  • Page 444: S Resizing Jpeg Images

    S Resizing JPEG Images You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, and a images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized. Select [Resize].

  • Page 445
    S Resizing JPEG Images Resize Options by Original Image Quality Available Resize Settings Original Image Quality Image Sizes Sizes for resized images are shown below. (Approx. pixels) Image Quality Full-frame (3:2) 4:3 (aspect ratio) 4160×2768* (11.5 megapixels) 3680×2768* (10.2 megapixels) 3120×2080 (6.5 megapixels) 2768×2080* (5.8 megapixels) 2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels)
  • Page 446: N Cropping Jpeg Images

    N Cropping JPEG Images You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image. Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, a, and b images. Images shot in RAW cannot be cropped. Select [Cropping]. Under the [x2] tab, select [Cropping], then press <0>.

  • Page 447
    N Cropping JPEG Images Moving the Cropping Frame Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area. Correcting the Tilt You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Press the <B> button, then while checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <5>…
  • Page 449: Sensor Cleaning

    Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

  • Page 450: Automatic Sensor Cleaning

    f Automatic Sensor Cleaning Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit automatically shakes off the dust on the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this operation. However, you can manually perform sensor cleaning or can disable this unit as follows.

  • Page 451
    f Automatic Sensor Cleaning For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed upright and stable on a table or other flat surface. Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf] option remains disabled temporarily.
  • Page 452: Appending Dust Delete Data

    Appending Dust Delete DataN Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images. However, for the case where visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later.

  • Page 453
    3 Appending Dust Delete DataN Shoot a solid-white object. At a distance of 20 cm — 30 cm (0.7 ft. — 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a patternless, solid-white object and take a picture. The picture will be taken in aperture- priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
  • Page 454: Dust Delete Data

    3 Appending Dust Delete DataN Dust Delete Data After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.

  • Page 455: Manual Sensor Cleaning

    Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera. The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended. Select [Sensor cleaning].

  • Page 456
    If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor. If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
  • Page 457: Print Order And Photobook Set-Up

    Print order and Photobook Set-up Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.458) You can specify printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. for the images recorded on the card. Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.464) You can specify the images for printing in a photobook from those saved on the card.

  • Page 458: W Digital Print Order Format (Dpof)

    W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.

  • Page 459
    W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Standard Prints one image on one sheet. Multiple thumbnail images are printed on Index one sheet. Print type Both Prints both the standard and index prints. [On] imprints the recorded date of the captured Date image.
  • Page 460
    W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting (p.458), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In such a case, resize the image (p.444), then print the index print.
  • Page 461
    W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 3 Specifying Images for Printing Selecting Images Select and specify the images one by one. If you press the <u> button and turn the <6> dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a three-image display.
  • Page 462
    W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Selecting Multiple Images Select Range Under [Multiple], select [Select range]. Select the first and last images of the desired range, then all the images in the range will be marked with the checkmark [X]. A print order for one copy of each image will be set.
  • Page 463
    W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions] (p.402) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all found images] and [Clear all found images]. All found images If you select [Mark all found images], a print order for one copy of all the images filtered by the search…
  • Page 464: Specifying Images For A Photobook

    p Specifying Images for a Photobook You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer, the specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder.

  • Page 465
    p Specifying Images for a Photobook 3 Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to all the specified images at once. Select [Multiple].
  • Page 466
    p Specifying Images for a Photobook 3 Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a photobook. Under [x1: Photobook Set-up], you can set [Multiple] to [All images in folder] or [All images on card] to specify all the images in the folder or on…
  • Page 467: Customizing The Camera

    Customizing the Camera You can make fine adjustments to various camera functions and change the functionality of buttons and dials to suit your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions and Custom Controls. You can also save the camera’s current settings to the <w>…

  • Page 468: Setting Custom Functions

    Setting Custom FunctionsN Select the [8] tab. Select the desired group. Select [C.Fn I: Exposure], [C.Fn II: Autofocus], or [C.Fn III: Operation/ Others], then press <0>. Select the Custom Function Custom Function number number. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the Custom Function number, then press <0>.

  • Page 469: Custom Functions

    Custom FunctionsN C.Fn I: Exposure A LV k Movie Shooting Shooting Exposure level increments ISO speed setting increments p.471 Bracketing auto cancel Bracketing sequence p.472 Number of bracketed shots Safety shift p.473 Exposure compensation auto cancel p.474 Metering mode, AE locked after focus C.Fn II: AF A LV k Movie…

  • Page 470
    3 Custom FunctionsN A LV k Movie C.Fn II: AF Shooting Shooting AF area selection method p.482 Orientation linked AF point p.483 Initial AF point, AI Servo AF p.484 Auto AF point selection: Color p.485 AF point selection movement p.486 AF point display during focus p.487 Viewfinder display illumination…
  • Page 471: Custom Function Settings

    Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I: Exposure C.Fn I-1 Exposure level increments 0: 1/3-stop 1: 1/2-stop Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. When [1:1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below. C.Fn I-2 ISO speed setting increments 0: 1/3-stop…

  • Page 472
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I-4 Bracketing sequence The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed. 0: 09-9+ 1: -909+ 2: +909- White Balance Bracketing B/A Direction M/G Direction 0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance — : Decreased exposure — : Blue bias — : Magenta bias + : Increased exposure + : Amber bias…
  • Page 473: Safety Shift

    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I-6 Safety shift 0: Disable 1: Shutter speed/Aperture Takes effect in the <s> shutter-priority AE and <f> aperture- priority AE modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected setting to obtain the standard exposure.

  • Page 474
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I-7 Exposure compensation auto cancel 0: Disable The exposure compensation setting will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. 1: Enable When you set the power switch to <2>, the exposure compensation setting will be canceled.
  • Page 475: Functions

    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II: AF C.Fn II-1 Tracking sensitivity Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during AI Servo AF when an obstacle cuts across the AF points or when the subject strays from the AF point. Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general. Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1 The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the…

  • Page 476
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-2 Acceleration/deceleration tracking This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving subjects whose speed can momentarily change dramatically by starting or stopping suddenly, etc. Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed).
  • Page 477
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-3 AF point auto switching This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF points as they track the subject moving dramatically up, down, left, or right. This setting takes effect when the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF.
  • Page 478
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-4 AI Servo 1st image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for the first shot with AI Servo AF. Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter release. Release priority Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if focus has not been achieved.
  • Page 479
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-5 AI Servo 2nd image priority With AI Servo AF for continuous shooting, you can preset the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for the subsequent shots after the first shot in continuous shooting. Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed.
  • Page 480
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-6 AF-assist beam firing Enables or disables the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam. 0: Enable The external Speedlite emits the AF-assist beam when necessary. 1: Disable The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. This prevents the AF-assist beam from disturbing others.
  • Page 481
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-7 Lens drive when AF impossible If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera keep searching for the precise focus or have it stop searching. 0: Continue focus search If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the precise focus.
  • Page 482
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-9 AF area selection method You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode. 0: S 9 AF area selection button After you press the <S> or <B> button, pressing the <B> button will change the AF area selection mode.
  • Page 483
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-10 Orientation linked AF point You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting. 0: Same for both vert/horiz The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or zone) are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
  • Page 484
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-11 Initial AF Point, AI Servo AF You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area selection mode is set to Auto selection AF. 0: Auto The AF point that AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to suit the shooting conditions.
  • Page 485
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-12 Auto AF point selection: Color tracking Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin tones. This function works when the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), or Automatic selection AF.
  • Page 486
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-13 AF point selection movement You can set either to stop the selection at the outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side in AF point selection. 0: Stops at AF area edges Useful if you often use an AF point along the edge.
  • Page 487
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-14 AF point display during focus You can set whether to display the AF point(s) before AF starts (shooting ready), when AF starts, during AF, when focus is achieved, and when the metering timer is active after focus is achieved. 0 : Selected (constant) 1 : All (constant) 2 : Selected (pre-AF,focused)
  • Page 488
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-15 Viewfinder display illumination You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder will light up in red when focus is achieved. 0: Auto The AF points achieving focus in low light or with a dark subject will automatically light up in red.
  • Page 489
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn III: Operation/Others C.Fn III-1 Warnings z in viewfinder When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.31). Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, then press <0>…
  • Page 490
    3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn III-2 Dial direction during Tv/Av 0: Normal 1: Reverse direction Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed. In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and <5>…
  • Page 491: 8: Fine Adjustment Of Af’s Point Of Focus

    8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” and “Notes for AF Microadjustment” on page 496. Normally, this adjustment is not required.

  • Page 492
    8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Make the adjustment. Set the adjustment amount. The adjustable range is ±20 steps. Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus. Setting it toward “+: ”…
  • Page 493
    8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN 2: Adjust by Lens You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses. When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
  • Page 494
    8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Entering the Serial Number Select the digit to be entered, then press <0> so r> is displayed. < Enter the number, then press <0>. After entering all the digits, select [OK]. Lens Serial Number In step 3, if “*”…
  • Page 495
    8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Make the adjustment. Single focal length lens For a zoom lens, select the wide- angle (W) or telephoto (T) end. Pressing <0> will turn off the orange frame and make the adjustment possible. Set the adjustment amount, then press <0>.
  • Page 496
    8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the intermediate range.
  • Page 497: 8: Custom Controls

    8: Custom ControlsN You can assign frequently-used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences for easy operations. Select [C.Fn III: Operation/ Others]. Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III: Operation/Others], then press <0>. Select [4: Custom Controls]. The Custom Controls setting screen will appear.

  • Page 498
    8: Custom ControlsN Assignable Functions to Camera Controls Function Page Metering and AF start AF stop ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO Direct AF point selection Pause Movie Servo AF Metering start AE lock/FE lock AE lock (hold) AE lock AE lock (while button pressed) FE lock Set ISO speed (hold button, turn Exposure compensation (hold button, turn…
  • Page 499
    8: Custom ControlsN < > stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses equipped with Image Stabilizer.
  • Page 500
    8: Custom ControlsN : Metering and AF start When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF are performed. : AF stop The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF. : ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO You can switch the AF operation.
  • Page 501
    8: Custom ControlsN Exposure : Metering start When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is performed. (AF is not performed.) : AE lock/FE lock When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the exposure (AE lock) while the metering timer is active. Useful when you want to set the focus and exposure separately.
  • Page 502
    8: Custom ControlsN : FE lock For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will fire a preflash and retain the required flash output (FE lock). : Set ISO speed (hold button, turn You can set the ISO speed by holding down the button assigned with this function and turning the <6>…
  • Page 503
    8: Custom ControlsN Image : Image quality Press <0> to display the recording quality setting screen (p.162) on the LCD monitor. : Picture Style Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection screen (p.176) on the LCD monitor. : White balance selection Press <0>…
  • Page 504
    8: Custom ControlsN : Flash function settings Press <0> to display the flash function setting screen (p.283). : Wi-Fi function Press <0> to display the wireless communication setting screen (p.540). : No function (disabled) Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the button.
  • Page 505: Registering My Menu

    Registering My MenuN Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name the registered menu tabs, and press the <M> button to display the My Menu tab first. Creating and Adding My Menu Tab Select [Add My Menu tab].

  • Page 506
    3 Registering My MenuN Select [Select items to register]. Register the desired items. Select the option to be set, then press <0>. Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog. You can register up to six items. To return to the screen in step 2, press the <M>…
  • Page 507: Enter Text

    3 Registering My MenuN Delete tab You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab. Rename tab You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*]. Select [Rename tab]. Enter text. Press the <L>…

  • Page 508
    3 Registering My MenuN Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items You can delete all the created My Menu tabs or My Menu items registered under them. Delete all My Menu tabs You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
  • Page 509
    3 Registering My MenuN Menu Display Settings You can select [Menu display] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press the <M> button. Normal display Displays the last displayed menu screen. Display from My Menu tab Displays with the [9] tab selected.
  • Page 510: W: Registering Custom Shooting Modes

    w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting functions, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s <w> and <x> positions. Select [Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)]. Under the [55] tab, select [Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)], then press <0>.

  • Page 511: Menu Functions

    w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes. Even in the <w> and <x> modes, you can still change shooting function settings and menu settings. Settings To Be Registered Shooting Function Settings Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation, AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode, Exposure compensation amount, AEB increment, Flash exposure compensation amount…

  • Page 512
    w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN [z4 (Movie shooting)] Movie Servo AF, AF method, Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity, Movie Servo AF speed, Metering timer, Grid, V button function [z5 (Movie shooting)] Video snapshot, Time-lapse movie (setting), Movie digital IS, Remote control [x2] Slide show (settings), Image jump with 6 [x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram display, Magnification (approx.)
  • Page 513: Reference

    Reference This chapter provides reference information for system accessories, camera features, etc. Certification Logo Select [55: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.

  • Page 514: System Map

    System Map ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 270EX II 430EX III-RT/ 600EX II-RT Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite 430EX III MR-14EX II MT-24EX Bundled Accessories Eyepiece Extender EP-EX15 Eyecup Eb Rubber Frame Eb E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses Strap Angle Finder C Battery Pack Battery Charger LP-E6N LC-E6…

  • Page 515
    System Map Directional Stereo Timer Remote Remote Wireless Microphone Controller Switch Controller DM-E1 TC-80N3 RS-80N3 LC-5 Remote Wireless Controller Remote RC-6 Control BR-E1 EF lenses HDMI Cable HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.) TV/Monitor Interface Cable IFC-400PCU (1.3 m/4.3 ft.) Connect Station Interface Cable CS100 IFC-200U (1.9 m/6.2 ft.)
  • Page 516: Checking The Battery Information

    Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result. The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movie shooting is not counted.)

  • Page 517
    3 Checking the Battery Information Registering Batteries to the Camera You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for each battery. Press the <B> button. With the battery info. screen displayed, press the <B>…
  • Page 518
    3 Checking the Battery Information Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels. Write the serial number on a Serial number label. Write the serial number displayed on the battery history screen on a label approx.
  • Page 519
    3 Checking the Battery Information Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not installed) and also when it was last used. Look for the serial number. Serial number Date last used Refer to the battery’s serial number label and look for the battery’s serial number on the battery history screen.
  • Page 520: Using A Household Power Outlet

    Using a Household Power Outlet You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (each sold separately). Place the cord in the groove. Carefully insert the DC coupler’s cord into the groove without damaging the cord.

  • Page 521
    Using a Household Power Outlet Do not use an AC adapter other than the AC-E6N (sold separately). While the camera’s power switch is on, do not connect or disconnect the power cord or connector, or disconnect the DC coupler. After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet. AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
  • Page 522: H Using Eye-Fi Cards

    H Using Eye-Fi Cards With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN. The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or contact the card manufacturer.

  • Page 523
    H Using Eye-Fi Cards Display the connection information. Select [Connection info.], then press <0>. Check the [Access point SSID:]. Check that an access point is displayed for [Access point SSID:]. You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s MAC address and firmware version. Press the <M>…
  • Page 524
    H Using Eye-Fi Cards Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards Under [Wi-Fi settings] of [51: Wireless communication settings], if [Wi-Fi] set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card will not be possible. If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card information.
  • Page 526: Function Availability Table By Shooting Mode

    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting (A, C, Creative Zone) o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled Function Shooting with ambience selection Background blur setting Image-recording quality JPEG Aspect ratio Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set Auto Picture Style Manual selection…

  • Page 527
    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting* Drive Silent continuous shooting* 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous Evaluative metering Partial metering Metering Spot metering Center-weighted average metering Program shift Exposure compensation AE lock…
  • Page 528
    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting (8: 2 q 3 5C r) o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled Function Brightness Color tone Panning effect Image-recording quality JPEG Aspect ratio Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set Auto Picture Style Manual selection…
  • Page 529
    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting* Drive Silent continuous shooting* 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous Evaluative metering Partial metering Metering Spot metering Center-weighted average metering Program shift Exposure compensation AE lock…
  • Page 530
    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting (8: 4 P y 6 F G) o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled Function Brightness Color tone Panning effect Image-recording quality JPEG Aspect ratio Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set Auto Picture Style…
  • Page 531
    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting* Drive Silent continuous shooting* 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous Evaluative metering Partial metering Metering Spot metering Center-weighted average metering Program shift Exposure compensation AE lock…
  • Page 532
    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Movie Shooting o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled A/C 8 d/s/f/F Function Movie recording quality selectable Auto Custom Sound recording Wind filter Attenuator HDR movie Time-lapse movie Full HD Video snapshot Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set…
  • Page 533
    Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode d/s/f/F Function u+Tracking Smooth zone Live 1-point AF Manual focusing (MF) Movie servo AF • Tracking sensitivity • AF speed Metering Program shift Exposure Exposure compensation AE lock GPS function Remote control shooting Quick Control Touch operation *1: Automatically set to NTSC: L 6 X/PAL:L 5 X.
  • Page 534: Menu Settings

    3Menu Settings Viewfinder Shooting (Basic Zone Modes) z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page 1 / 41 / 61 Image quality* 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b Image review time Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold Release shutter Enable / Disable without card…

  • Page 535
    3Menu Settings Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting (Creative Zone Modes) z: Shooting 1* (Red) Page 1 / 41 / 61 Image quality 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b Image review time* Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold Release shutter Enable / Disable without card*…
  • Page 536
    3Menu Settings z: Shooting 2 (Red) Page Exposure compensation: ±5 stops* in 1/3- or Exposure 1/2-stop increments compensation/ AEB setting* AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments ISO speed / ISO speed range / Auto range / zISO speed settings* Minimum shutter speed Disable / Low / Standard / High Auto Lighting …
  • Page 537: Software

    3Menu Settings z: Shooting 3 (Red) Page DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape / uFine Detail / Picture Style SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser Defined 1-3 Noise reduction for Disable / Auto / Enable long exposures* High ISO speed noise Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot reduction Noise Reduction*…

  • Page 538
    3Menu Settings z: Shooting 4 (Red) Page Interval timer* Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots) Bulb timer Disable / Enable (Exposure time) Anti-flicker shooting* Disable / Enable Mirror lockup* Disable / Enable Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 Live View shooting* Enable / Disable *1: Not displayed for Live View shooting.
  • Page 539
    3Menu Settings 3: Playback 1 (Blue) Page Protect images Protect images Rotate image Rotate images Erase images Erase images Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) Photobook set-up Specify images for a photobook RAW image processing Process 1 images 3: Playback 2 (Blue) Page Cropping…
  • Page 540
    3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 1 (Yellow) Page Select folder Create and select a folder Numbering: Continuous / Auto reset File numbering Manual reset Vertical image auto OnzD / OnD / Off rotation Format card Erase data on the card by formatting Displayed when a commercially-available Eye- Eye-Fi settings Fi card is inserted…
  • Page 541
    3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 2 (Yellow) Page 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30 Auto power off min. / Disable LCD brightness LCD brightness adjustable to 7 levels LCD off/on* Remains on / Shutter btn. Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) / Date/Time/Zone Daylight saving time / Time zone…
  • Page 542
    3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 4 (Yellow): For viewfinder shooting Page Touch operation Standard / Sensitive / Disable Beep Enable / Touch / Disable Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter Battery information count / Recharge performance Auto cleaningf: Enable / Disable Sensor cleaning Clean nowf Clean manually…
  • Page 543: Software

    3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 5 (Yellow) Page Custom shooting Register setting / Clear settings / Auto update modes (C1, C2) settings Clear all camera Resets the camera to the default settings settings Display copyright information / Enter author’s Copyright information name / Enter copyright details / Delete copyright information URL and QR code for downloading Instruction…

  • Page 544
    3Menu Settings 8: Custom Functions (Orange) Page C.Fn I: Exposure C.Fn II: Autofocus Customize camera functions as desired C.Fn III: Operation/ Others Clear all Custom Clear Custom Function settings Functions (C.Fn) 9: My Menu (Green) Page Add My Menu tab Add My Menu tabs 1-5 Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all items…
  • Page 545
    3Menu Settings Movie Shooting z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page 1920×1080 / 1280×720 NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p Movie recording size PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p Standard (IPB) / Light (IPB) Sound recording* : Auto / Manual / Disable Sound-recording level Sound recording Wind filter: Auto / Disable Attenuator: Disable / Enable…
  • Page 546
    3Menu Settings z: Shooting 4* (Red) Page Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable AF method u+Tracking / Smooth zone / Live 1-point AF Movie Servo AF Locked on (-3/-2/-1) / 0 / Responsive (+1/+2/+3) tracking sensitivity When active: Always on / During shooting Movie Servo AF Speed AF speed: Slow (-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1) / Standard / Fast (+1/+2)
  • Page 547
    3Menu Settings z: Shooting 5* (Red) Page Video snapshot: Enable / Disable Album settings: Create a new album / Add to Video snapshot existing album Show confirm message: Enable / Disable Time-lapse movie: Disable / Enable H(3840×2160) / Enable L(1920×1080) Shooting interval (hr., min., sec.) Number of shots Time-lapse movie…
  • Page 548: Troubleshooting Guide

    The battery does not recharge. If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.516) is 94% or higher, the battery will not be recharged. Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6. The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.

  • Page 549
    [Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is displayed. Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6. Remove and install the battery again (p.42). If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
  • Page 550
    Troubleshooting Guide The camera turns off by itself. Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.73). Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx.
  • Page 551
    Troubleshooting Guide The card cannot be used. If a card error message is displayed, see page 45 or 567. An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in another camera. Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and it may not be possible to use the card.
  • Page 552
    Troubleshooting Guide There are fewer AF points or the Area AF frame shape is different. Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and patterns and Area AF frame shape vary. The lenses are categorized into 8 groups from A to H (p.145). Check which group your lens belongs to.
  • Page 553
    The maximum burst shown in the table on page 164 is based on Canon’s testing card. (The faster the card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum burst will be.) Therefore, the maximum burst displayed in the viewfinder may differ from the actual maximum burst.
  • Page 554
    Troubleshooting Guide ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected. If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 — ISO 40000 (for still photo shooting). Even if you set [ISO speed range] to expand the setting range, you cannot select L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
  • Page 555
    The flash does not fire. Make sure the flash is securely attached to the camera. If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z5: Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.303). The flash always fires at full output.
  • Page 556
    Troubleshooting Guide Remote control shooting is not possible. When taking still photos, set the drive mode to <Q> or <k> (p.157). When shooting movies, set [z5: Remote control] to [Enable] (p.381). Check the position of the remote controller’s release timing switch.
  • Page 557
    Troubleshooting Guide Shot images are not displayed when continuous shooting is performed during Live View shooting. If the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the shot images are not displayed during continuous shooting (p.291). During movie shooting, the red E icon is displayed. It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high.
  • Page 558
    Troubleshooting Guide The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie shooting. For viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting, the ISO speed will be set according to [ISO speed range] under [z2: zISO speed settings] (p.173). For movie shooting, the ISO speed will be set according to [ISO speed range] under [z2: kISO speed settings] (p.372).
  • Page 559
    Troubleshooting Guide The subject looks distorted during movie shooting. If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting. I cannot take still photos during movie shooting.
  • Page 560
    Troubleshooting Guide Operation Problems I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5>, <9>, or <d>. Set the <R> switch downward (lock release) (p.59). Check the [54: Multi function lock] setting (p.88). Touch operation is not possible. Make sure [54: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive] (p.69).
  • Page 561
    Troubleshooting Guide The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”). Set [z2: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first character will be an underscore (p.208). The file name starts with “MVI_”. It is a movie file (p.211). The file numbering does not start from 0001.
  • Page 562
    Troubleshooting Guide [###] is displayed. If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the camera can display, [###] will be displayed. In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow. In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal) characteristics.
  • Page 563
    Troubleshooting Guide Playback Problems Part of the image blinks in black. [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.397). A red box is displayed on the image. [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.397). During image playback, the AF points are not displayed. The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are played back: •…
  • Page 564
    Troubleshooting Guide Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during movie playback. If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.347).
  • Page 565: Software

    Troubleshooting Guide My card reader does not recognize the card. Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable (sold separately), then transfer the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594).

  • Page 566: Software

    Troubleshooting Guide Sensor Cleaning Problems The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning. Under [54: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but no picture will be recorded to the card (p.450). Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

  • Page 567: Error Codes

    Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the lens contacts. Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a genuine Canon lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.27, 28, 42). Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card with the camera.

  • Page 568: Specifications

    Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data • Recording System Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0 Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original), RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible Pixels recorded: L (Large) : Approx. 26.0 megapixels (6240 x 4160) M (Medium) : Approx.

  • Page 569: Image Processing During Shooting

    Specifications • Image Processing During Shooting Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 — 3 White balance: Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature setting (approx.

  • Page 570: Exposure Control

    Specifications • Autofocus (during viewfinder shooting) Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference detection with the dedicated AF sensor AF points: Max. 45 points (Cross-type AF point: Max. 45 points) * Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF points, and Cross-type AF points vary depending on the lens used.

  • Page 571
    Specifications Shooting mode: Basic Zone modes: Scene Intelligent Auto, Creative Auto, Special Scene (Portrait, Group Photo, Landscape, Sports, Kids, Panning, Close-up, Food, Candlelight, Night Portrait, Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control) Creative Zone modes: Program AE, Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb exposure, Custom shooting modes (C1/C2) ISO speed…
  • Page 572: Multiple Exposures

    Specifications • Multiple Exposures Number of multiple 2 to 9 exposures exposures: Multiple-exposure control:Additive, average • Shutter Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter Shutter speed: 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range; available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync at 1/180 sec.

  • Page 573
    Specifications * Based on Canon’s standard testing SD card (Standard: 8 GB, High-speed: 16 GB, UHS-I compatible) and standard testing conditions (High-speed continuous shooting, ISO 100, Standard Picture Style). * Figures in parentheses are the number of shots when a Canon’s standard testing UHS-I SD card is used.
  • Page 574
    Specifications • Movie Shooting Recording format: * For time-lapse movies: MOV format Movie: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Variable (Average) bit rate * For 4K time-lapse movies: Motion JPEG Audio: Movie recording size: Full HD (1920×1080), HD (1280×720) * For time-lapse movies: 4K (3840×2160) and Full HD selectable Frame rate: 59.94p/29.97p/23.98p (with NTSC)
  • Page 575
    Specifications [Time-lapse movie] (Reading speed) 4K Time-lapse movie (29.97p/25.00p) : UHS-I 90 MB/sec. or faster Full HD Time-lapse movie (29.97p/25.00p) : UHS-I Speed Class 3 or faster Focus method: Dual pixel CMOS AF AF method: Face+Tracking, Smooth zone, Live 1-point AF Manual focusing (approx.
  • Page 576
    Specifications ISO speed settings: For movie shooting, you can set the ISO speed range, maximum limit for ISO Auto, and maximum limit for time- lapse movie shooting with ISO Auto Sound recording: Built-in stereo microphones, external stereo microphone jack provided Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided, attenuator provided Grid display:…
  • Page 577: Print Ordering

    Specifications Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink AF point display: Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting conditions) Grid display: 3 types Magnified view: Approx. 1.5x-10x, initial magnification and position settable Image search: Search conditions settable (by rating, date, folder, protected, file type) Image browsing method:1 image, 10 images, Specified number, Date, Folder, Movies, Stills, Protect, Rating…

  • Page 578
    Specifications Geotag information Latitude, Longitude, Elevation, Coordinated Universal appended to image: Time (UTC), Satellite signal acquisition status Position update interval: 1 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 5 min. Time setting: GPS time data set to camera Log data: One file per day, NMEA format * Change in time zone creates another file.
  • Page 579: Dimensions And Weight

    Working humidity: 85% or less All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines. Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).

  • Page 580
    The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
  • Page 581: Software

    Third party software This product includes third party software. expat.h Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the «Software»), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to…

  • Page 582
    Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note…
  • Page 584
    If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment. Canon U.S.A. Inc. One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A. Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666) CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
  • Page 585
    USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. For CA, USA only Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
  • Page 593: Software Start Guide / Downloading Images To A Computer

    Software Start Guide / Downloading Images to a Computer This chapter describes about the EOS software, how to download and install the software, how to use the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files), and how to transfer images to a computer.

  • Page 594: Software Start Guide

    Software Start Guide Software Overview You can download the following EOS software from the Canon Web site (p.596). You cannot install the EOS software to a computer without an Internet connection. EOS Utility With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.

  • Page 595
    Software Start Guide Map Utility Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen by using the geotag location information recorded with GPS function. EOS MOVIE Utility This software enables you to play back the time-lapse movies you shot.
  • Page 596
    (The previous version will be overwritten.) Download the software. Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following Canon Web site. www.canon.com/icpd Select your country or region of residence and download the software.
  • Page 597: Software Instruction Manuals

    Software Start Guide Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon Web site to your computer. Software Instruction Manual Download Site www.canon.com/icpd To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version recommended) is required.

  • Page 598: Downloading Images To A Computer

    Downloading Images to a Computer You can use EOS software to download images from the camera to a computer. There are two ways to do this. Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer Install the software (p.596) Use the interface cable (sold separately) to connect the camera to the computer.

  • Page 599: Downloading Images With A Card Reader

    Downloading Images to a Computer Downloading Images with a Card Reader You can use a card reader to download images to a computer. Install the software (p.596) Insert the card into the card reader. Use Digital Photo Professional to download the images. Refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (p.597).

  • Page 600: Index

    Index Numerics Area AF frame ….135, 140 Beeper ……..73 10- or 2-sec. self-timer….159 Color tracking….142, 485 w1280x720 (movie)….341 Cross-type focusing ….143 L1920x1080 (movie) ….341 Difficult subjects for AF ..153, 316 H3840x2160 Direct AF point selection..500 Dual cross-type focusing ..

  • Page 601
    Index Auto power off……47, 73 Auto reset……..213 w/x (Custom shooting) …. 510 Auto time setting (GPS) ….227 C(Creative Auto) ……100 Autofocus 9 AF Camera Automatic selection (AF)..135, 140 Camera shake…… 55, 96 Av (Aperture-priority AE)….238 Camera vibration blur..96, 265 Default settings ……
  • Page 602
    Index Contrast ……..181, 194 Downloading images to a Copyright information….214 computer ……..598 Creative Auto ……..100 DPOF Creative Zone modes …..36 (Digital Print Order Format)..458 Cropping (images) ……446 Dragging……… 68 Cross-type focusing ……143 Drive mode……..156 Custom Controls ……497 Dual cross-type focusing….
  • Page 603
    Index Faithful (U) …….178 Flash mode……..283 FAT32……..71, 345 Flash sync contacts ……28 FE lock ……….278 Flash sync. speed in Av mode ..282 Feature guide……..90 Focus indicator ……. 94, 131 Focus lock ……97, 131 (Flash Exposure Bracketing)..285 Focus mode switch..
  • Page 604
    Index HDR shooting …….253 Histogram …….. 398 Image-recording Help ……….91 quality …… 162, 164, 341 Text size ……..92 Index display……399 High dynamic range 9 HDR Jump display (image browsing) 400 High ISO speed noise reduction …195 Magnifying images….404 High-Definition ……341 Manual reset ……
  • Page 605
    Index Jump display ………400 AF operation ……305 Exposure simulation….303 u+Tracking ……309 Grid display ……302 Kids ……….113 Information display….293 Live 1-point AF……313 Manual focusing……. 321 Landscape ……..111 Metering timer ……302 Landscape (R)……177 Possible shots……291 Quick Control ……
  • Page 606
    Index Medium External microphone….347 File size……344, 345 (image-recording quality) ….164 Frame rate ……. 342 Memory cards 9 Cards Grid display……377 Menu……….64 HDR movie shooting….348 Dimmed menu items ….66 Information display….334 My Menu……..505 Manual exposure shooting..330 Setting procedure …….65 Metering timer……
  • Page 607
    Battery level ……. 48, 516 Long exposures ……197 Charging ……..40 Nomenclature……..28 Household power ….. 520 Non-Canon flash units ….280 Possible shots…. 48, 164, 291 Normal (Image-recording quality) .162 Recharge performance …. 516 NTSC ……342, 427, 541 Pressing completely ……. 56 Pressing halfway ……
  • Page 608
    Index Remote control terminal..28, 276 w/x (Custom shooting) ..510 C(Creative Auto) ….100 Remote controller ….271, 273 A (Scene Intelligent Auto)..94 Remote switch ……276 P (Program AE) ……. 234 Repeat (slide show) ……424 8 (Special scene) ….107 Resizing ……..444 Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ….
  • Page 609
    Index Standard (IPB) ……342 Standard (P)……177 Vari-angle LCD monitor …. 46, 99 M icon……….8 Vertical image auto rotation..435 Strap ……….38 Video snapshots ……361 Strength (Sharpness) ….181 Video system….341, 427, 541 Subjects difficult to Viewfinder focus ……153, 316, 374 Dioptric adjustment ….
  • Page 610
    The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of March 2017. For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual, refer to the Canon Web site.

Языки:

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.59 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    15.27 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    2.26 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.84 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    1.7 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.06 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.11 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Русский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    28.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.53 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.13 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.28 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.67 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.08 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Английский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.71 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Украинский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.85 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.67 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.67 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Словацкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.93 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Словацкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    13.69 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.73 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    13.58 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.74 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    13.61 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.6 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.84 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.31 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    14.88 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    53.89 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    13.67 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    28.44 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    13.58 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    26.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.44 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    30.13 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    14.84 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    30.28 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.64 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    51.58 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.61 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.64 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(183 страницы)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    29.85 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use Digital Photo Professional software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(121 страница)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.31 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use EOS Utility software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(609 страниц)

  • Языки:Турецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    39.28 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    9.78 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    9.8 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Словацкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.54 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.53 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    9.91 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.79 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    9.88 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.59 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.25 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Латышский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.53 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.64 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.92 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.79 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    9.93 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    16.51 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.55 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    16.28 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.96 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.67 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    9.94 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(170 страниц)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.49 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use the Wi-Fi functionality for your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    9.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(610 страниц)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.41 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    1.89 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    1.89 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Латышский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    1.66 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    2.25 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    2.4 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    2.07 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    2.27 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    1.89 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(22 страницы)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    1.93 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Украинский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.88 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Украинский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.92 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.66 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Шведский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.66 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Финский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.12 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Словацкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.09 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Словацкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.72 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.91 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.06 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Португальский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Польский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.79 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.05 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.61 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Нидерландский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.69 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.08 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Венгерский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.35 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Литовский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.74 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Литовский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.09 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Литовский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.72 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Латышский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.07 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Латышский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.78 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Латышский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.69 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.86 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.11 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Казахский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    27.8 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.84 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Итальянский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.62 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.05 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.09 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Французский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.03 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    12.03 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.05 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Испанский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    30.77 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    10.6 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.01 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Эстонский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    28.41 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.15 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.94 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Греческий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    33.13 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.81 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.06 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Немецкий
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.48 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.06 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.62 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Датский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    32.04 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(29 страниц)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    3.07 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 1.7 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(100 страниц)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    11.72 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 3.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Preview

Canon EOS 6D Mark II инструкция по эксплуатации
(149 страниц)

  • Языки:Чешский
  • Тип:
    PDF
  • Размер:
    31.87 MB
  • Описание:
    This document contains instructions on how to use your product. It corresponds to version 4.8 of the software.

Просмотр

Перейти к контенту

Русские электронные инструкции по эксплуатации

Русские электронные инструкции по эксплуатации

Постоянно обновляемый большой каталог документации по эксплуатации и использованию современных устройств и оборудования на русском языке. Бесплатное скачивание файлов.

Поиск:

    Главная

    ♥ В закладки

    Просмотр инструкции в pdf

    Поделиться в ВКонтакте

    Поделиться в одноклассниках

    Поделиться в MAIL.RU

    Инструкция по эксплуатации фотоаппарата зеркального Canon EOS 6D Mark II.

    Скачать инструкцию к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 6D Mark II (10,96 МБ)



    Инструкции по эксплуатации фотоаппаратов зеркальных Canon

    « Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 1300D EF-S 18-135mm f 3-5-5-6 IS

    » Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 4000D EF-S 18-55 III Kit

    Вам также может быть интересно

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 1200D 18-55IS Kit

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 2000D EF-S 18-55 IS II Kit

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 750D Kit 18-55 IS STM Black

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 1300D 18-55 DC Kit

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 600D Kit 18-55 IS Black

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 7D 18-135 IS Kit Black

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 70D Body

    Инструкция к фотоаппарату зеркальному Canon EOS 800D+EF-S 18-200mm f 3-5-5-6 IS

    Добавить комментарий

    Имя *

    Email *

    Сайт

    Комментарий

    ;-) :| :x :twisted: :smile: :shock: :sad: :roll: :razz: :oops: :o :mrgreen: :lol: :idea: :grin: :evil: :cry: :cool: :arrow: :???: :?: :!:

    Сохранить моё имя, email и адрес сайта в этом браузере для последующих моих комментариев.

    • Добавить инструкцию
    • Заказать инструкцию
    • Политика конфиденциальности
    • Page 1
      Instruction manuals (PDF files) and software can be downloaded from the Canon Web site (p.4, 596). INSTRUCTION www.canon.com/icpd MANUAL…
    • Page 2: Introduction

      Introduction The EOS 6D Mark II is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a full-frame (approx. 35.9 x 24.0 mm) CMOS sensor with approx. 26.2 effective megapixels, DIGIC 7, normal ISO speed range of ISO 100 — ISO 40000 (for still photos), high-precision and high-speed 45-point AF (up to 45 cross-type points), maximum continuous shooting speed of approx.

    • Page 3: Item Check List

      Be careful not to lose any of the above items. For items sold separately, see the System Map (p.514). When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon Web site (p.4). The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF files) are for lenses sold individually.

    • Page 4: Instruction Manuals

      Canon Web site to your computer or the like. Downloading the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files) The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon Web site to your computer or the like. Instruction Manual (PDF files) download site: •…

    • Page 5: Compatible Cards

      The Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded to your smartphone or tablet using the QR code. www.canon.com/icpd A software application is required to read out the QR code. Select your country or region of residence, then download the Instruction Manuals.

    • Page 6: Quick Start Guide

      Quick Start Guide Insert the battery (p.42) Upon purchase, charge the battery to start using (p.40). Insert the card (p.43) With the card’s label facing toward the back of the camera, insert it into the card slot. Attach the lens (p.53) Align the red mount index on the lens with the red mount index on the…

    • Page 7
      Quick Start Guide Flip out the LCD monitor (p.46) When the LCD monitor displays the date/time/zone setting screen, see page 49. Focus on the subject (p.56) Look through the viewfinder and aim the viewfinder center over the subject. Press the shutter button halfway, and the camera will focus on the subject.
    • Page 8: Conventions Used In This Manual

      Conventions Used in this Manual Icons in this Manual <6> : Indicates the Main Dial. <5> : Indicates the Quick Control Dial. <9> : Indicates the Multi-controller. <W><X><Y><Z> : Indicates the direction of the shift or move when the key on the Multi-controller is pressed. <0>…

    • Page 9: Chapters

      Chapters Introduction Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations Basic Shooting Setting the AF and Drive Modes Image Settings GPS Settings Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects Flash Photography Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) Shooting Movies Image Playback Post-Processing Images Sensor cleaning Print Order and Photobook Set-up Customizing the Camera…

    • Page 10: Table Of Contents

      Contents Introduction Item Check List…………….. 3 Instruction Manuals …………….4 Compatible Cards…………….5 Quick Start Guide …………….6 Conventions Used in this Manual…………. 8 Chapters………………. 9 Index to Features …………….18 Safety Precautions …………….. 22 Handling Precautions …………..25 Nomenclature …………….. 28 Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations Charging the Battery …………..

    • Page 11
      Contents Formatting the Card …………….70 Before You Start …………….73 Disabling the Beeper …………..73 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off……..73 Setting the Image Review Time ………..74 Turning the LCD Monitor Off/On ……….74 Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings……75 l Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder ……..
    • Page 12
      Contents 8: r Panning……………..114 8: 4 Shooting Close-ups …………116 8: P Shooting Food…………..117 8: y Shooting Candlelight Portraits ……..118 8: 6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) ……119 8: F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld) ……. 120 8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes ……….121 Q Quick Control …………….
    • Page 13
      Contents Customizing a Picture Style …………180 Registering a Picture Style…………183 B: Setting the White Balance…………185 u White Balance Correction …………191 Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast ……… 194 Setting Noise Reduction ……………195 Highlight Tone Priority …………..199 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical Characteristics ..
    • Page 14
      Contents a: Manual Exposure …………..241 q Selecting the Metering Mode……….243 O Setting the Desired Exposure Compensation ……245 h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)……….. 247 A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock) ……249 F: Long (Bulb) Exposures …………250 w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting ……
    • Page 15
      Contents Shooting Movies k Shooting Movies …………..326 Shooting Function Settings …………339 Setting the Movie Recording Quality……….341 Setting the Sound Recording …………346 Shooting HDR Movies…………..348 a Shooting Time-lapse Movies……….349 Shooting Video Snapshots…………361 Menu Function Settings …………..371 Image Playback x Image Playback …………..388 B: Shooting Information Display ……….391 H Index display (Multiple-image Display) ……..399…
    • Page 16
      Contents Slide Show (Auto Playback) …………424 Viewing Images on a TV Set …………427 L Erasing Images……………. 430 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ……… 434 Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images …….. 435 Post-Processing Images R Processing RAW Images with the Camera……438 S Resizing JPEG Images…………
    • Page 17
      Contents Registering My Menu …………..505 w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes……..510 Reference System Map ……………… 514 Checking the Battery Information……….516 Using a Household Power Outlet……….520 H Using Eye-Fi Cards …………..522 Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode…….526 Menu Settings …………….
    • Page 18: Index To Features

      Index to Features Power LCD monitor Charging the battery p.40 Vari-angle p.46 Battery level p.48 Touch control p.67 Checking battery Brightness p.434 information p.516 Half-press Off/On p.74 Household power outlet p.520 Electronic level p.80 Auto power off p.73 Shooting mode guide p.89 Feature guide p.90…

    • Page 19
      Index to Features Image Recording Settings Shooting Creating/Selecting a Shooting mode p.35 folder p.209 • Basic Zone modes p.35 File numbering p.211 • SCN mode p.108 • Creative Zone modes p.36 Image Quality Aspect ratio p.168 Image-recording quality p.162 HDR mode p.253 ISO speed (still photos) p.170…
    • Page 20
      Index to Features Flash Movie Shooting External flash p.278 Autoexposure shooting p.326 Flash exposure Manual exposure compensation p.278 shooting p.330 FE lock p.278 ISO speed (movie) p.372 Flash function settings p.281 AF method p.308 Flash Custom Function Movie Servo AF p.373 settings p.286…
    • Page 21
      Index to Features Playback Customization Image review time p.74 Custom Functions (C.Fn) p.469 Single-image display p.388 Custom Controls p.497 Shooting information My Menu p.505 display p.391 Custom shooting mode p.510 Index display p.399 Sensor Cleaning and Dust Image browsing Reduction (Jump display) p.400 Setting image search…
    • Page 22: Safety Precautions

      If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer from whom you purchased the product. Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or serious Warnings: injuries may result.

    • Page 23
      Safety Precautions Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an explosion or a fire. If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts, do not touch the exposed internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock. Do not disassemble or modify the equipment.
    • Page 24
      Safety Precautions Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury or Cautions: property damage may result. Do not use or store the product in a high-temperature location such as inside a car under the hot sun. The product may become hot and cause burns. Doing so may also cause battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life of the product.
    • Page 25: Handling Precautions

      If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly consult the nearest Canon Service Center. Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such as a magnet or electric motor.

    • Page 26
      Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest Canon Service Center. Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to prevent the contacts from corroding.
    • Page 27
      Handling Precautions LCD Panel and LCD Monitor Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may be dead, and there may also be spots of black, red, or other colors. This is not a malfunction.
    • Page 28: Nomenclature

      Nomenclature <R> Drive mode selection <f> AF operation/AF method selection button button (p.156, 159) (p.130, 305/308) <i> ISO speed setting <B> AF area selection button (p.136, 482) button (p.170) GPS antenna <q> Metering mode selection button (p.243) Lens mount index (p.53) Flash sync contacts <U>…

    • Page 29
      Nomenclature LCD panel (p.33, 34) <p> AF start button (p.56, 130, 292, 337) Eyecup (p.270) <A> AE lock/ FE lock button Viewfinder eyepiece (p.249, 278) <S> AF point selection button <B> Info button (p.136, 137) (p.60, 80, 84, 91, 293, 298, 334, 388) Power switch (p.47) Speaker…
    • Page 30
      Nomenclature <A> Live View shooting/ <k> Movie shooting switch (p.289/325) <0> Start/Stop button Dioptric adjustment knob (p.55) (p.290, 326) <V> Focal plane mark Access lamp (p.44) Strap mount (p.38) <u> Index/ Magnify/ Card slot Reduce button cover (p.43) (p.399/317, 321, 404) Battery Accessory positioning hole compartment…
    • Page 31
      Nomenclature Viewfinder Information Display Electronic level (p.81) Large Zone AF frame (p.140) Area AF frame (p.140) Spot metering circle (p.244) Aspect ratio line 16:9 (p.168) Focusing screen Aspect ratio line 1:1 (p.168) Grid (p.79) <S> AF point <O> Spot AF point Aspect ratio (p.139) line 4:3…
    • Page 32
      Nomenclature <i> ISO speed (p.170) <o> Focus indicator (p.94, 131) <A> AE lock (p.249) Maximum burst for AEB in-progress continuous shooting (p.167) (p.247) Number of remaining multiple exposures (p.259) <D> Flash-ready (p.278) ISO speed (p.170) Improper FE lock warning Consecutive self-timer shots (p.159) <d>…
    • Page 33: Lcd Panel

      Nomenclature LCD Panel Drive mode (p.156, 159) <A> Highlight tone priority (p.199) u Single shooting o High-speed continuous shooting <i> ISO speed (p.170) i Low-speed continuous shooting B Silent single shooting ISO speed (p.170) M Silent continuous shooting Consecutive self-timer shots Q Self-timer: 10 sec./remote control (p.159) k Self-timer: 2 sec./remote control…

    • Page 34
      Nomenclature <P> Multiple-exposure shooting <a> Time-lapse movie shooting (p.349) (p.258) <s> Bluetooth function <H> Bulb timer shooting/ Interval timer shooting <z> Warning icon (p.251/267) (p.489) <l> Wi-Fi function <r> GPS acquisition status Battery level (p.48) <x> Logging function <O> Exposure compensation Exposure level indicator (p.245) Exposure compensation amount…
    • Page 35: Shooting Mode

      Nomenclature Mode Dial You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button). Basic Zone All you do is press the shutter button. The camera sets everything to suit the subject or scene for shooting.

    • Page 36
      Nomenclature Creative Zone These modes give you more control for shooting various subjects as desired. d : Program AE (p.234) s : Shutter-priority AE (p.236) f : Aperture-priority AE (p.238) a : Manual exposure (p.241) F : Bulb (p.250) Custom shooting mode You can register the shooting mode (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F>), AF operation, menu settings, etc.
    • Page 37
      Nomenclature Battery Charger LC-E6 Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.40). Power plug Battery pack slot Charge lamp IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS. DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
    • Page 38: Attaching The Strap

      Nomenclature Attaching the Strap Pass the end of the strap through the camera’s strap mount eyelet from the bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the strap to take up any slack and make sure the strap will not loosen from the buckle.

    • Page 39: Getting Started And Basic Camera Operations

      Getting Started and Basic Camera Operations This chapter describes preparatory steps before you start shooting and the basic camera operations.

    • Page 40: Charging The Battery

      Charging the Battery Remove the protective cover. Detach the protective cover provided with the battery. Attach the battery. As shown in the illustration, attach the battery securely to the charger. To detach the battery, follow the above procedure in reverse. Recharge the battery.

    • Page 41
      Charging the Battery Tips for Using the Battery and Charger Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged. Charge the battery before use. Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used. Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity. After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the charger from the power outlet.
    • Page 42: Installing And Removing The Battery

      Installing and Removing the Battery Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera. The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed, and darkens when the battery is removed. If the battery is not installed, the image in the viewfinder becomes blurred and you cannot perform focusing.

    • Page 43: Installing And Removing The Card

      Installing and Removing the Card You can use an SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory card (sold separately) with the camera. The captured images are recorded onto the card. Make sure the card’s write-protect switch is set upward to enable writing and erasing. Installing the Card Open the cover.

    • Page 44: Removing The Card

      Installing and Removing the Card Removing the Card Open the cover. Set the power switch to <2>. Check that the access lamp is off, then open the cover. If [Recording…] is displayed on the LCD monitor, close the cover. Access lamp Remove the card.

    • Page 45
      Installing and Removing the Card When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also, never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or blinking.
    • Page 46: Using The Lcd Monitor

      Using the LCD Monitor After you flip out the LCD monitor, you can set menu functions, use Live View shooting, shoot movies, or play back photos and movies. You can change the direction and angle of the LCD monitor. Flip out the LCD monitor. Rotate the LCD monitor.

    • Page 47: Turning On The Power

      Turning on the Power If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting screen appears, see page 49 to set the date/time/zone. <1> : The camera turns on. <2> : The camera is turned off and does not function. Set the power switch to this position when not using the camera.

    • Page 48: Battery Level

      Turning on the Power z Battery Level Indicator When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon < > indicates that the battery will soon be exhausted. Display Level (%) 100 — 70…

    • Page 49: Setting The Date, Time, And Zone

      Setting the Date, Time, and Zone When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone have been reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps below to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time zone in which you currently live so that when you travel, you can simply change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination, and the camera will automatically adjust the date/ time.

    • Page 50
      3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Zone], then press <0>. Press the <W> <X> keys to select the time zone, then press <0>. If your desired time zone is not listed, press the <M> button, then proceed to the next step to set it (with the time difference from the Coordinated Universal Time, UTC).
    • Page 51
      3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone Set the daylight saving time. Set it as necessary. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select [Y]. Press <0> so <r> is displayed. Press the <W> <X> keys to select [Z], then press <0>. When the daylight saving time is set to [Z], the time set in step 4 will advance by 1 hr.
    • Page 52: Selecting The Interface Language

      Selecting the Interface Language Display the menu screen. Press the <M> button to display the menu screen. Under the [52] tab, select [LanguageK]. Press the <Q> button and select the [5] tab. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the [52] tab. Press the <W>…

    • Page 53: Attaching And Detaching A Lens

      Attaching and Detaching a Lens The camera is compatible with all Canon EF lenses. The camera cannot be used with EF-S or EF-M lenses. Attaching a Lens Remove the caps. Remove the rear lens cap and the body cap by turning them as shown by the arrows.

    • Page 54: Detaching

      Attaching and Detaching a Lens Detaching the Lens While pressing the lens release button, turn the lens as shown by the arrow. Turn the lens until it stops, then detach it. Attach the rear lens cap to the detached lens. Do not look at the sun directly through any lens.

    • Page 55: Basic Shooting Operations

      Basic Shooting Operations Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity Turn the dioptric adjustment knob. Turn the knob left or right so that the AF points in the viewfinder look sharp. If the knob is difficult to turn, remove the eyecup (p.270). If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder image, using E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses (sold separately) is recommended.

    • Page 56: Shutter Button

      Basic Shooting Operations Shutter Button The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely. Pressing Halfway This activates autofocusing and the automatic exposure system that sets the shutter speed and aperture.

    • Page 57: Mode Dial

      Basic Shooting Operations Mode Dial Turn the dial while holding down the lock release button at the center of the dial. Use it to set the shooting mode. Main Dial After pressing a button, turn the <6> dial. When you press a button such as <f>, <R>, <i>, or <q>, the respective function remains selectable for approx.

    • Page 58
      Basic Shooting Operations Quick Control Dial After pressing a button, turn the <5> dial. When you press a button such as <f>, <i>, or <q>, the respective function remains selectable for approx. 6 sec. (9). During this time, you can turn the <5>…
    • Page 59
      Basic Shooting Operations Multi-controller The <9> consists of an eight-direction key. Use it to select the AF point, correct the white balance, move the AF point or magnifying frame during Live View shooting or movie shooting, set the Quick Control, etc. You can also use it to select menu items.
    • Page 60: Lcd Panel Illumination

      Basic Shooting Operations U LCD Panel Illumination You can illuminate the LCD panel by pressing the <U> button. Turn on (9) or off the LCD panel illumination by pressing the <U> button. During a bulb exposure, pressing the shutter button completely will turn off the LCD panel illumination.

    • Page 61: Q Quick Control For Shooting Functions

      Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the LCD monitor with intuitive operations. This is called Quick Control. Press the <Q> button The Quick Control screen will appear. Set the desired functions. Press the <W>…

    • Page 62
      Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions Functions Settable with the Quick Control Creative Zone modes Aperture (p.238) Shutter speed (p.236) Flash exposure compensation (p.278, 285) Exposure compensation/ ISO speed (p.170) AEB setting Wi-Fi function (p.245/247) Picture Style (p.176) Custom Controls (p.497) Image-recording quality AF operation (p.130) (p.162)
    • Page 63: Quick Control

      Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions Quick Control Select the desired function and press <0>. The function setting screen will appear. Turn the <6> or <5> dial, then press the <Y> <Z> keys to change the setting. There are also functions that are set by pressing a button <0>…

    • Page 64: Menu Operations And Configurations

      Menu Operations and Configurations You can configure various settings with the menus such as the image- recording quality, date/time, etc. <M> button <Q> button <6> Main Dial LCD monitor <5> Quick Control Dial Multi-controller <0> button <W><X><Y><Z> keys Basic Zone Modes Menu Screen * In Basic Zone modes, some tabs and menu items do not appear.

    • Page 65
      3 Menu Operations and Configurations Menu Setting Procedure Display the menu screen. Press the <M> button to display the menu screen. Select a tab. Each time you press the <Q> button, the main tab (group of functions) will switch. Press the Multi-controller’s <Y> <Z>…
    • Page 66
      3 Menu Operations and Configurations The description of menu functions hereafter assumes that you have pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen. You can also tap on the menu screen or turn the <6> or <5> dial to operate the menu.
    • Page 67: Operating The Camera With Touch Screen

      d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen You can operate the camera by tapping on the LCD monitor (touch- sensitive panel) with your fingers. Sample Screen (Quick Control) Use your finger to tap on (touch briefly and then remove your finger from) the LCD monitor.

    • Page 68: The Screen

      d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen Drag Sample Screen (Menu screen) Slide your finger while touching the LCD monitor. Sample Screen (Scale display) Examples of operations possible by dragging your finger on the screen Selecting a menu tab or item after pressing the <M> button Setting with scale display Quick Control Selecting AF points (except with Live View shooting)

    • Page 69
      d Operating the Camera with Touch Screen 3 Setting the Touch Control Response Select [Touch control]. Under the [54] tab, select [Touch control], then press <0>. Set the touch control response setting. Select the desired setting, then press <0>. [Standard] is the normal setting. [Sensitive] provides a more reactive touch screen response than [Standard].
    • Page 70: Formatting The Card

      Formatting the Card If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or computer, format the card with this camera. When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make sure there is nothing you need to keep.

    • Page 71
      3 Formatting the Card Format the card in the following cases: The card is new. The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer. The card is full of images or data. A card-related error is displayed (p.567). Low-level Formatting Perform low-level formatting if the card’s writing or reading speed seems slow or if you want to totally erase the data on the card.
    • Page 72
      3 Formatting the Card If you format an SDXC card with this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and the card may become unusable. Certain computer operating systems or card readers may not recognize a card formatted in exFAT.
    • Page 73: Before You Start

      Before You Start 3 Disabling the Beeper You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved, during self-timer shooting, and during touch operations. Select [Beep]. Under the [54] tab, select [Beep], then press <0>. Select [Disable]. Select [Disable], then press <0>. The beeper will not sound.

    • Page 74: Setting The Image Review Time

      Before You Start 3 Setting the Image Review Time You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor immediately after shooting. To keep the captured image displayed, set [Hold]. To not have the captured image displayed, set [Off]. Select [Image review].

    • Page 75: Reverting The Camera To The Default Settings

      Before You Start 3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be reverted to their defaults. Select [Clear all camera settings]. Under the [55] tab, select [Clear all camera settings], then press <0>. Select [OK].

    • Page 76
      Before You Start Shooting Function Settings Image Recording Settings AF operation One-Shot AF Image quality Automatic AF area selection Aspect ratio selection AF mode Picture Style Auto Disable after One- Lens electronic Auto Lighting Standard Shot AF Optimizer q (Evaluative Lens aberration correction Metering mode metering)
    • Page 77
      Before You Start Camera Settings Live View Shooting Settings Image review time 2 sec. Live View shooting Enable One-Shot AF Release shutter AF operation Enable without card AF method u+Tracking Image jump w/6 e (10 images) Touch Shutter Disable Disable 8 sec.
    • Page 78
      Before You Start Movie Shooting Settings Movie Servo AF Enable Movie recording NTSC:L6X PAL:L5X size AF method u+Tracking Sound recording Auto Movie Servo AF track sensitivity Wind filter Auto Disable Attenuator Movie Servo AF Speed kISO speed settings When active Always on ISO speed Auto…
    • Page 79: Displaying The Grid In The Viewfinder

      Displaying the Grid in the Viewfinder You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt or compose the shot. Select [Viewfinder display]. Under the [52] tab, select [Viewfinder display], then press <0>. Select [Grid display]. Select [Show].

    • Page 80: Q Displaying The Electronic Level

      Displaying the Electronic Level You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the viewfinder to help you correct the camera tilt. Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor Press the <B> button. Each time you press the <B> button, the screen display will change.

    • Page 81: Electronic Level

      3 Displaying the Electronic Level 3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder. Since this indicator is displayed during shooting, you can take the picture while checking the camera tilt. Select [Viewfinder display].

    • Page 82: Setting The Viewfinder Information Display

      Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN The shooting function settings (Battery level, Shooting mode, AF operation, Image quality (image type), Drive mode, Metering mode, Flicker detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder. By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X]. Select [Viewfinder display]. Under the [52] tab, select [Viewfinder display], then press <0>.

    • Page 83
      3 Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality (image type: JPEG/RAW) will not be displayed. Regardless of whether it is checkmarked, the respective information will appear in the viewfinder in the following cases: when you change the shooting mode, when you press the <f>, <R>, or <q>…
    • Page 84: B Button Functions

      B Button Functions During viewfinder shooting, when you press the <B> button with the camera being ready to shoot, you can toggle the display between the electronic level (p.80) and Quick Control screen (p.86). [z button display options] under the [54] tab enables you to select the options displayed when the <B>…

    • Page 85
      B Button Functions If you turn off the power with the electronic level or Quick Control screen displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn on the power again. To cancel this function, press the <B> button a number of times until the screen is blank, then turn off the power switch.
    • Page 86: Quick Control Screen

      B Button Functions Quick Control Screen AE lock Aperture Shutter speed Highlight tone priority ISO speed Shooting modes Exposure level Flash exposure indicator compensation Exposure compensation Wi-Fi function White balance Custom Controls correction Image-recording Picture Style quality AF operation Possible shots/ Quick Control icon Auto cleaning Battery level…

    • Page 87
      B Button Functions Button Operations with Quick Control Screen Displayed When you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, <q>, <S>, or <B> button, the setting screen appears and you can set it with <6>, <5>, <9>, or <B> button. AF operation Drive mode ISO speed Metering mode…
    • Page 88: R Setting The Multi Function Lock

      R Setting the Multi Function Lock By setting the <R> switch upward, you can prevent the settings from being changed by accidentally operating the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial, or Multi-controller or by inadvertently tapping on the touch screen. For details on the Multi function lock switch, see page 59. Select [Multi function lock].

    • Page 89: Setting The Shooting Mode Guide

      Setting the Shooting Mode Guide When you turn the Mode Dial to select a shooting mode, a brief description (shooting mode guide) of the shooting mode can be displayed on the screen. During viewfinder shooting, the mode guide appears when the Quick Control screen or electronic level is displayed. By default, it is set to [Enable].

    • Page 90: Setting The Feature Guide

      Setting the Feature Guide When using Quick Control, a brief description (feature guide) of the selected function can be displayed. The Feature guide can be displayed during viewfinder shooting, Live View shooting, and movie shooting. By default, it is set to [Enable]. Select [Feature guide].

    • Page 91: Help

      Help When [zHelp] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. Press the <B> button to display the Help. Press it again to turn off the Help display. If the Help fills more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. In such a case, press <W>…

    • Page 92
      Help Help Display Text Size You can select the text size for the Help display. By default, it is set to [Small]. Select [Help text size]. Under the [53] tab, select [Help text size], then press <0>. Set the text size. Select [Small] or [Standard], then press <0>.
    • Page 93: Basic Shooting

      Basic Shooting This chapter describes how to use the Basic Zone modes on the Mode Dial for best results. With Basic Zone modes, all you do is point and shoot, and the camera sets everything automatically (p.127, 526). Also, because advanced shooting function settings cannot be changed, you can enjoy shooting photographs without worrying about botched pictures due to misoperation.

    • Page 94: A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)

      A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) <A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene and sets the optimum settings automatically. It can also adjust focus automatically on either the still or moving subject by detecting the motion of the subject (p.97).

    • Page 95
      A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) Take the picture. Press the shutter button completely to take the picture. The captured image will be displayed for approx. 2 sec. on the LCD monitor. The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor, and sunset scenes.
    • Page 96
      The shutter speed display is blinking. Since it is too dark, taking the picture may result in a blurred subject due to camera shake. Using a tripod or a Canon EX-series Speedlite (sold separately, p.278) is recommended. When the external flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out unnaturally dark.
    • Page 97: A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)

      A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) Recomposing the Shot Depending on the scene, positioning the subject toward the left or right to include a balanced background will result in a picture with better perspective. In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a still subject will lock the focus on that subject.

    • Page 98: A Live View Shooting

      A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) A Live View Shooting You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 289. Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <A>. Display the Live View image on the LCD monitor.

    • Page 99
      A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) You can also rotate the LCD monitor to shoot at different angles. For details, see page 46. Normal angle Low angle High angle…
    • Page 100: C Creative Auto Shooting

      C Creative Auto Shooting <C> is a fully-automatic shooting mode that is a step more advanced from <A>. You can first adjust the photo’s ambience, background blur, etc. before shooting. By pressing the <Q> button, you can set 1. Ambience-based shots, 2. Background blur setting, 3.

    • Page 101
      C Creative Auto Shooting (1) Ambience-based shots (4) AF point selection (2) Background blur Possible shots Battery level Image-recording quality (3) Drive mode (1) Ambience-based shots You can select and shoot with the ambience you want to convey in your images.
    • Page 102
      C Creative Auto Shooting Ambience Settings gAmbience: Standard This provides standard image characteristics. h Vivid The subject looks crisp, sharp and vivid. Effective for making the picture look more impressive than with [g Ambience: Standard]. i Soft The subject is less defined, giving the picture a softer and daintier look.
    • Page 103
      C Creative Auto Shooting (2) Background blur You can adjust the degree of background blur. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the effect. With the (2) item on page 101 selected, press <0> to display the screen shown on the left.
    • Page 104
      C Creative Auto Shooting (3) Drive mode You can select single shooting, continuous shooting, or self-timer. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to select the desired mode. Pressing <0> will display the screen shown on the left. Turn the <6> dial to select the desired setting.
    • Page 105
      C Creative Auto Shooting Using Effect Preview in Live View Shooting In the <C> mode, when you set the [Ambience-based shots] or [Background blur], shooting while checking the resulting effect on the Live View image is recommended. Display the Live View image. Set the Live View/Movie shooting switch to <A>, then press the <0>…
    • Page 106
      C Creative Auto Shooting Set [Background Blur]. Press the <Q> button to exit the Quick Control. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to adjust the blur while checking it on the screen (p.103). While you adjust it, [Simulating blur] will be displayed. Take the picture.
    • Page 107: 8: Special Scene Mode

      8: Special Scene Mode The camera will automatically choose the appropriate settings when you select a shooting mode for your subject or scene. * <8> stands for Special Scene. Set the Mode Dial to <8>. Press the <Q> button The Quick Control screen will appear. Select [Choose scene].

    • Page 108: Scn Mode

      8: Special Scene Mode SCN Modes 2: Portrait (p.109) q: Group Photo 3: Landscape (p.111) (p.110) 5: Sports (p.112) C: Kids (p.113) r: Panning (p.114) 4: Close-up (p.116) y: Candlelight (p.118) P: Food (p.117) G: HDR Backlight F: Handheld Night 6: Night Portrait Control (p.121) (p.119)

    • Page 109: 8: 2 Shooting Portraits

      8: 2 Shooting Portraits The <2> (Portrait) mode blurs the background to make the human subject stand out. It also makes skin tones and hair look softer. Shooting Tips Select the location where the distance between the subject and the background is the farthest. The further the distance between the subject and background, the more blurred the background will look.

    • Page 110: 8: Q Shooting Group Photos

      8: q Shooting Group Photos Use the <q> (Group Photo) mode to shoot group photos. You can take a picture in which both the people in the front and people in the back are all in focus. Shooting Tips Use a wide-angle lens. When using a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end to make it easy to get all the people in the group in focus at once, from the front row to the back.

    • Page 111: 8: 3 Shooting Landscapes

      8: 3 Shooting Landscapes Use the <3> (Landscape) mode for expansive scenery or to have everything in focus from near to far. For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images. Shooting Tips With a zoom lens, use the wide-angle end. When using a zoom lens, set the lens to the wide-angle end to make the objects near and far in focus.

    • Page 112: 8: 5 Shooting Moving Subjects

      8: 5 Shooting Moving Subjects Use the <5> (Sports) mode to shoot a moving subject, such as a running person or a moving vehicle. Shooting Tips Use a telephoto lens. Use of a telephoto lens is recommended to enable shooting from a distance.

    • Page 113: 8: C Photographing Children

      8: C Photographing Children To photograph the children running around, use <C> (Kids). Skin tones will look healthy. Shooting Tips Track the subject with the Area AF frame. After aiming the Area AF frame over the subject, press the shutter button halfway to start focusing.

    • Page 114: 8: R Panning

      8: r Panning If you want to take a picture with the feel of speed and a blurred motion effect on the subject’s background, use <r> (Panning). With Live View shooting, if you use a lens supporting the <r> mode, subject blur is detected, corrected, and reduced.

    • Page 115
      [Effect] to [Med] or [Min] to reduce the blur. See the cautions on page 122. To see which lenses support the <r> mode, refer to the Canon Web site. When using a lens supporting the <r> mode during Live View shooting, subject blur can be corrected and the shutter speed will be set automatically according to the setting of [Effect], regardless of the lens’s…
    • Page 116: 8: 4 Shooting Close-Ups

      8: 4 Shooting Close-ups When you want to shoot flowers or small things up close, use the <4> (Close-up) mode. To make small things appear much larger, use a macro lens (sold separately). Shooting Tips Use a simple background. A simple background makes small objects such as flowers stand out better.

    • Page 117: 8: P Shooting Food

      8: P Shooting Food When you want to take pictures of food, use <P> (Food). The photo will look bright and appetizing. Also, depending on the light source, the reddish tinge will be suppressed in the pictures taken under tungsten lights, etc.

    • Page 118: 8: Y Shooting Candlelight Portraits

      8: y Shooting Candlelight Portraits When you want to photograph a person in candlelight, use <y> (Candlelight). The atmosphere of candlelight is reflected in the color tones of the picture. Shooting Tips Use the center AF point to focus. Aim the center AF point in the viewfinder on the subject, then shoot. Prevent camera shake if the numeric display (shutter speed) in the viewfinder blinks.

    • Page 119: 8: 6 Shooting Night Portraits (With A Tripod)

      8: 6 Shooting Night Portraits (With a Tripod) When you want to photograph people at night and obtain a natural- looking night scene in the background, use the <6> (Night Portrait) mode. Note that an external Speedlite is required for shooting. Using a tripod is recommended.

    • Page 120: 8: F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld)

      8: F Shooting Night Scenes (Handheld) Using a tripod when shooting a night scene gives the best results. However, the <F> (Handheld Night Scene) mode enables you to shoot night scenes even while handholding the camera. In this shooting mode, four shots are taken consecutively for each picture, and the resulting one image with reduced camera shake is recorded.

    • Page 121: 8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes

      8: G Shooting Backlit Scenes When shooting a scene having both the bright and dark areas, use the <G> (HDR Backlight Control) mode. When you take one picture in this mode, three consecutive shots are taken at different exposures. This results in one image, with a wide tonal range, that has minimized the clipped shadows caused by backlighting.

    • Page 122
      Cautions for the <8> Modes • <q> Group Photo Since distortion correction is applied, the camera records an image area narrower than the one seen through the viewfinder. (The image periphery is slightly trimmed and the resolution looks slightly lowered.) Also, during Live View shooting, the angle of view changes slightly.
    • Page 123
      • <r> Panning (continued) If the lens does not support the <r> mode, subject blur will not be corrected. However, the automatic shutter speed adjustment alone will take effect according to the setting of [Effect]. When shooting under bright light such as a sunny summer day or when shooting a slow subject, the set degree of panning effect may not be obtained.
    • Page 124
      • <6> Night Portrait Tell the subject to keep still even after the flash fires. During Live View shooting, achieving focus may be difficult when the face of the subject looks dark. In such a case, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>…
    • Page 125
      • <F> Handheld Night Scene (continued) If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave afterimages, or the surrounding area of the subject may become dark. The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns (lattice, stripes, etc.), flat or single-tone images, or images significantly misaligned due to camera shake.
    • Page 126: Q Quick Control

      Q Quick Control In Basic Zone modes, pressing the <Q> button sets the items shown in the tables on the next page with the Quick Control. Set the Mode Dial to a Basic Zone mode. Press the <Q> button Example: < A > mode The Quick Control screen will appear.

    • Page 127
      Q Quick Control Settable Functions in Basic Zone Modes o: Default setting : User selectable : Not selectable Function Ambience-based shots (p.101) Background blur (p.103) Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Drive Silent single shooting mode Silent continuous shooting (p.156) 10-sec.
    • Page 128
      Q Quick Control o: Default setting : User selectable : Not selectable Function Color tone (p.106) Brightness (p.106) Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Drive Silent single shooting mode Silent continuous shooting (p.156) 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous shooting AF point selection (p.136, 137) *1: If you change the shooting mode or set the power switch to <2>, all the…
    • Page 129: Setting The Af And Drive Modes

      Setting the AF and Drive Modes The AF points in the viewfinder are arranged to make AF shooting suitable for a wide variety of subjects and scenes. You can also select the AF operation and drive mode that best match the shooting conditions and subject. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>).

    • Page 130: F: Selecting The Af Operation

      f: Selecting the AF OperationN You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode. Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF>.

    • Page 131
      f: Selecting the AF OperationN One-Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. The AF point that achieves focus is displayed, and the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will also light AF point With the camera in the default Focus indicator…
    • Page 132: Ai Servo Af For Moving Subjects

      f: Selecting the AF OperationN AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.

    • Page 133
      f: Selecting the AF OperationN AF Points Lighting Up in Red By default, the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low- light conditions or on a dark subject. In Creative Zone modes, you can set whether to have the AF points light up in red when focus is achieved (p.488).
    • Page 134: S Selecting The Af Area And Af Point

      S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point The camera has 45 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject. Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc.

    • Page 135
      S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point G Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone) The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right) for focusing. H Automatic selection AF The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus.
    • Page 136
      S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode Press the <S> or <B> button Look through the viewfinder and press the <S> or <B> button. Press the <B> button. Each time you press the <B> button, the AF area selection mode changes.
    • Page 137: Af Point Selection

      S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point Selecting the AF Point Manually You can manually select the AF point or zone. Press the <S> or <B> button The AF points will be displayed in the viewfinder. In the Zone AF mode or Large Zone AF mode, the selected zone will be displayed.

    • Page 138
      S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point AF Point Display Indications Pressing the <S> or <B> button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see pages 143-148.
    • Page 139: Af Area Selection Mode

      AF Area Selection Mode Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection) For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than with Single-point AF. Select one AF point < > to focus. Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing on overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage. Since Single-point Spot AF covers a very small area, focusing may be difficult during handheld or low-light shooting or for a moving subject.

    • Page 140
      AF Area Selection Mode Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone) The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right) for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF and all the AF points in the selected zone are used for Automatic selection AF, it is superior to Single-point AF in tracking the subject, and it is effective for moving subjects.
    • Page 141
      AF Area Selection Mode When AI Servo AF mode is set for Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF, the active AF point <r> will keep switching to track the subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject.
    • Page 142: Color Tracking

      AF Area Selection Mode AF Using Color Tracking With the camera in its default state, if the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF (Manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone), or Auto selection AF, color tracking AF detecting colors comparable to human skin tones will be performed (except in <8: 3r4Py6F>…

    • Page 143: Af Sensor

      AF Sensor The camera’s AF sensor has 45 AF points. The illustration below shows the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. When using lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster, high-precision AF is possible at the viewfinder center. Depending on the lens used, the number of usable AF points, AF point patterns, Area AF frame shape, etc.

    • Page 144
      AF Sensor This focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision focusing for lenses with a maximum aperture of f/2.8 or faster. A diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on the subjects that may be difficult to focus. It is provided at the center AF point. These focusing sensors are geared for lenses with a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster (and some supporting f/8).
    • Page 145: Lenses And Usable Af Points

      AF points will stay lit.) Regarding lighting up or blinking of the AF points, see page 138. Regarding new lenses released after the EOS 6D Mark II (in the second half of 2017), check the Canon Web site to see which group they belong Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.

    • Page 146
      Lenses and Usable AF Points Group B Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable. : Cross-type AF point. Subject tracking performance is superior and high-precision focusing is achieved. Group C Autofocusing with 45 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes are selectable.
    • Page 147
      Lenses and Usable AF Points Group E Autofocusing with the 35 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.
    • Page 148
      Lenses and Usable AF Points Group G Autofocusing with 27 points is possible. (Not possible with all 45 AF points.) Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be selected in AF area selection mode. During automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area (Area AF frame) will be different from 45-point Automatic selection AF.
    • Page 149: Lens Group

      Lenses and Usable AF Points Lens Group Designations EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM EF14mm f/2.8L USM EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM EF14mm f/2.8L II USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye EF200mm f/1.8L USM EF20mm f/2.8 USM EF200mm f/1.8L USM EF24mm f/1.4L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF24mm f/1.4L II USM EF200mm f/1.8L USM…

    • Page 150
      Lenses and Usable AF Points EF300mm f/4L IS USM EF500mm f/4L IS II USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8) EF300mm f/4L IS USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF500mm f/4.5L USM EF300mm f/4L IS USM EF500mm f/4.5L USM + Extender EF2x I/II/III H (f/8) + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III H (f/8)*…
    • Page 151
      Lenses and Usable AF Points EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 + Extender EF2x I/II/III EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM…
    • Page 152
      Lenses and Usable AF Points EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x EF100-200mm f/4.5A EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM Extender 1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III B EF100-300mm f/5.6 EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM EF100-300mm f/5.6L Extender 1.4x: With built-in Ext.1.4x + Extender EF1.4x I/II/III…
    • Page 153: When Autofocus Fails

      When Autofocus Fails Autofocus may fail to achieve focus (focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder blinks) with special subjects such as the following: Subjects Difficult to Focus on Subjects with very low contrast (Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.) Subjects in very low light Strongly backlit or reflective subjects (Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)

    • Page 154: Mf: Manual Focus

      MF: Manual Focus If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, follow the procedure below to focus manually. Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>. <4 L> will be displayed on the LCD panel. Focus on the subject. Focusing ring Turn the lens focusing ring until the subject looks sharp in the viewfinder.

    • Page 155: Setting Lens Electronic Mf

      Setting Lens Electronic MFN With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with electronic manual focusing, you can set whether to use electronic manual focusing after autofocusing in One-Shot AF mode. The default setting is [Disable after One-Shot AF]. EF50mm f/1.0L USM EF300mm f/2.8L USM EF600mm f/4L USM EF85mm f/1.2L USM…

    • Page 156: Selecting The Drive Mode

      i Selecting the Drive Mode Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the drive mode suiting the scene or subject. Press the <R> button Select the drive mode. While looking at the LCD panel or in the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial. u : Single shooting When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will be taken.

    • Page 157
      i Selecting the Drive Mode i : Low-speed continuous shooting While you hold down the shutter button completely, you can shoot continuously at max. approx. 3.0 shots/sec. (except the <r> mode). Note that during Live View shooting, if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], subject tracking is given priority (Subject-tracking priority) at a continuous shooting speed of max.
    • Page 158
      i Selecting the Drive Mode The approx. 6.5 shots/sec. maximum high-speed continuous shooting speed <o> (p.156) is achieved under the following conditions: Fully charged battery pack, 1/500 sec. or faster shutter speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), flicker reduction disabled, and Live View shooting with One-Shot AF*.
    • Page 159: Using The Self-Timer

      j Using the Self-timer Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture such as a commemorative photograph. Press the <R> button Select the self-timer. While looking at the LCD panel or in the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial. Q : Shoot in 10 sec.

    • Page 160
      j Using the Self-timer If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button, attach the eyepiece cover (p.270). If stray light enters the viewfinder when the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure. With <q>, the interval between multiple shots may be prolonged depending on shooting conditions such as the image-recording quality and external flash use.
    • Page 161: Image Settings

      Image Settings This chapter describes image-related functions: Image- recording quality, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, white balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction, highlight tone priority, lens aberration correction, anti- flicker shooting, and other functions. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>).

    • Page 162: Setting The Image-Recording Quality

      Setting the Image-Recording Quality You can select the pixel count and the image quality. Seven JPEG quality settings are provided: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, and b. Three RAW image-recording quality settings are provided: 1, 41, and 61 (p.166). Select [Image quality].

    • Page 163
      3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality Image-recording Quality Setting Examples 73 only 1 only 1+73 61+74…
    • Page 164
      3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.) Maximum Burst Image Pixels Print File Size Possible High Quality Recorded Size (MB) Shots Standard Speed JPEG 1000 1950 1870 3570 2820 6.5M 5310 3.8M 4170 32.6 25.3 6.5M 17.4 RAW+JPEG 32.6 + 7.5…
    • Page 165
      3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality The number of possible shots is based on Canon’s testing standards and an 8 GB card. The maximum burst during continuous shooting is based on Canon’s standard testing SD card (Standard: 8 GB, High-speed: UHS-I 16 GB) and testing standards (<o>…
    • Page 166: Raw Images

      Previous versions of DPP Ver.4.x cannot process RAW images taken with this camera. If a previous version of DPP Ver.4.x is installed on your computer, obtain and install the latest version of DPP from the Canon Web site to update it (p.596). (The previous version will be overwritten.) Note that DPP Ver.3.x or earlier cannot process RAW images taken with…

    • Page 167: Maximum Burst

      3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting The approximate maximum burst is displayed at the bottom right of the viewfinder and Quick Control screen. If the maximum burst for continuous shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be displayed.

    • Page 168: Setting The Aspect Ratio

      Setting the Aspect RatioN You can change the image’s aspect ratio. [3:2] is set by default. When [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] is set, frame lines indicating the image area will be displayed in the viewfinder. During Live View shooting, the image appears with the surrounding area masked in black on the LCD monitor.

    • Page 169
      3 Setting the Aspect RatioN Aspect Ratio 16:9 With viewfinder shooting With Live View shooting Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.) Image Quality 16:9 6240×4160 5536×4160* 6240×3504* 4160×4160 (26.0 megapixels) (23.0 megapixels) (21.9 megapixels) (17.3 megapixels) 4160×2768* 3680×2768* 4160×2336* 2768×2768 (11.5 megapixels) (10.2 megapixels) (9.7 megapixels)
    • Page 170: I: Setting The Iso Speed For Still Photos

      i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the ambient light level. In Basic Zone modes, the ISO speed is set automatically (p.172). Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 327 and 331.

    • Page 171
      i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN As H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400) are expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower compared with the standard setting.
    • Page 172: Iso Auto

      i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN ISO Auto If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the actual ISO speed to be set will be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway. As indicated below, the ISO speed will be set automatically to suit the shooting mode.

    • Page 173
      i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN 3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within L (equivalent to ISO 50) to H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), and the maximum limit within ISO 100 to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
    • Page 174
      i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN 3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for ISO Auto You can set the automatic ISO speed range for ISO Auto within ISO 100 — ISO 40000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 — ISO 25600, and the maximum limit within ISO 200 — ISO 40000.
    • Page 175
      i: Setting the ISO Speed for Still PhotosN 3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for ISO Auto You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set automatically will not be too slow when ISO Auto is set. This is effective in the <d>…
    • Page 176: Selecting A Picture Style

      Selecting a Picture StyleN Just by selecting a preset Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics effectively matching your photographic expression or the subject. In Basic Zone modes, [D] (Auto) is set automatically. Select [Picture Style]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Picture Style], then press <0>.

    • Page 177
      3 Selecting a Picture StyleN Picture Style Characteristics D Auto The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The colors will look vivid for blue skies, greenery and sunsets, particularly in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes. If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture Style.
    • Page 178
      3 Selecting a Picture StyleN U Faithful Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. For subdued images with modest brightness and color saturation.
    • Page 179
      3 Selecting a Picture StyleN Symbols The Picture Style selection screen has icons for [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters. The numerals indicate the values for these parameters set for the respective Picture Style. Symbols Sharpness Strength…
    • Page 180: Customizing A Picture Style

      Customizing a Picture StyleN You can customize the Picture Styles. You can change or adjust the parameter settings of Picture Styles such as [Strength], [Fineness], or [Threshold] for [Sharpness] as well as [Contrast] and other parameters from the default settings. To see the resulting effects, take test shots.

    • Page 181
      3 Customizing a Picture StyleN Set the parameter. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to adjust the parameter, then press <0>. Press the <M> button to save the adjusted parameter settings. The Picture Style selection screen will reappear. The value of parameter settings different from the default will be displayed in blue.
    • Page 182
      3 Customizing a Picture StyleN V Monochrome Adjustment Besides the effects described on the preceding page such as [Contrast], or [Strength], [Fineness] and [Threshold] for [Sharpness], you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect]. kFilter effect With a filter effect applied to a monochrome image, you can make white clouds or green trees stand out more.
    • Page 183: Registering A Picture Style

      Registering a Picture StyleN You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape], adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1], [User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3]. Useful when you want to preset multiple Picture Styles with different settings.

    • Page 184
      3 Registering a Picture StyleN Select a parameter. Select the parameter (such as [Strength] under [Sharpness]) to be set, then press <0>. Set the parameter. Adjust the effect level of the parameter, then press <0>. For details, see “Customizing a Picture Style”…
    • Page 185: B: Setting The White Balance

      B: Setting the White BalanceN White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally, the Auto [Q] (Ambience priority) or [Qw] (White priority) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If natural-looking colors cannot be obtained with Auto, you can select the white balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white object.

    • Page 186: White Balance

      B: Setting the White BalanceN White Balance To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of lighting. With a digital camera, the white for color correction basis is decided depending on the color temperature of the illumination, and then the color is adjusted with software to make the white areas look white.

    • Page 187: Auto White Balance

      B: Setting the White BalanceN Q Auto White Balance With [Q] (Ambience priority), you can increase the intensity of the image’s warm color cast when shooting a tungsten-light scene. If you select [Qw] (White priority), you can reduce the intensity of the image’s warm color cast.

    • Page 188: O Custom White Balance

      B: Setting the White BalanceN O Custom White Balance With custom white balance, you can manually set the white balance for the specific light source of the shooting location. Make sure to perform this procedure under the light source at the actual location of the shoot. Shoot a white object.

    • Page 189
      B: Setting the White BalanceN Select [White balance]. Under the [z2] tab, select [White balance], then press <0>. Select the custom white balance. Select [ ], then press <0>. If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
    • Page 190: P Setting The Color Temperature

      B: Setting the White BalanceN P Setting the Color Temperature You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is for advanced users. Select [White balance]. Under the [z2] tab, select [White balance], then press <0>. Set the color temperature. Select [P].

    • Page 191: White Balance Correction

      u White Balance CorrectionN You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be corrected to one of nine levels. This function is for advanced users, particularly for those users who understand the use of color temperature conversion and color compensating filters and their effects.

    • Page 192: White Balance Auto Bracketing

      u White Balance CorrectionN White Balance Auto Bracketing With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber bias and magenta/green bias.

    • Page 193
      u White Balance CorrectionN During white balance bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will be lower. Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record the image to the card. You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white balance bracketing.
    • Page 194: Auto Correction Of Brightness And Contrast

      Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG images, the correction is applied when the image is captured. In Basic Zone modes, [Standard] is set automatically.

    • Page 195: Setting Noise Reduction

      Setting Noise ReductionN High ISO Speed Noise Reduction This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high ISO speeds. When shooting at low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the image (shadow areas) can further be reduced.

    • Page 196
      3 Setting Noise ReductionN Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the noise reduction effect may become smaller. If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera shake.
    • Page 197: Exposures

      3 Setting Noise ReductionN Long Exposure Noise Reduction For images exposed for 1 sec. or longer, noise (dots of light and banding) typical of long exposures can be reduced. Select [Long exp. noise reduction]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Long exp.

    • Page 198
      3 Setting Noise ReductionN With [Auto] or [Enable] set, the noise reduction process after the picture is taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. However, even when noise reduction process is in progress, you can continue to take pictures as long as the maximum burst indicator in the viewfinder shows “1”…
    • Page 199: Highlight Tone Priority

      Highlight Tone PriorityN You can reduce overexposed, clipped highlights. Select [Highlight tone priority]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Highlight tone priority], then press <0>. Select [Enable]. Highlight details are improved. The dynamic range is expanded from the standard 18% gray to bright highlights.

    • Page 200: Correction Of Lens Aberrations Due To Optical Characteristics

      Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners look darker due to the optical characteristics of the lens. Color fringing along subject outlines is called chromatic aberration. Image distortion due to optical characteristics of the lens is called distortion.

    • Page 201: Chromatic Aberration Correction

      3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Select [Enable]. Check that [Correction data available] is displayed for the attached lens. Select [Enable], then press <0>. Take the picture. The image will be recorded with the peripheral illumination corrected. Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image periphery.

    • Page 202: Distortion Correction

      3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Distortion Correction Select [Distortion correction]. Select [Enable]. Check that [Correction data available] is displayed for the attached lens. Select [Enable], then press <0>. Take the picture. The image will be recorded with the distortion corrected.

    • Page 203
      3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Diffraction Correction Select [Diffraction correction]. Select [Enable]. Select [Enable], then press <0>. Take the picture. The image will be recorded with the diffraction corrected. Depending on shooting conditions, noise may be intensified together with the effects of correction.
    • Page 204
      3 Correction of Lens Aberrations due to Optical CharacteristicsN Lens Correction Data The lens correction data for lens aberration corrections is registered (stored) in the camera. With [Enable] selected, the peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, distortion correction, and diffraction correction will be applied automatically. With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594), you can check which lenses have their correction data registered in the camera.
    • Page 205
      JPEG images already taken. When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is recommended even if [Correction data available] is displayed. If you use the magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral illumination correction and distortion correction will not be reflected in the image displayed on the screen.
    • Page 206: Reducing Flicker

      Reducing FlickerN If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors across the images may result.

    • Page 207
      3 Reducing FlickerN The color tone of the captured images when [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to [Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set. Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected. Also, if the flickering frequency of the light source changes during continuous shooting, effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
    • Page 208: Setting The Color Space

      Setting the Color SpaceN The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended. In Basic Zone modes, [sRGB] is set automatically. Select [Color space].

    • Page 209: Creating And Selecting A Folder

      Creating and Selecting a Folder You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images are to be saved. This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for saving captured images. Creating a Folder Select [Select folder]. Under the [51] tab, select [Select folder], then press <0>.

    • Page 210: Selecting A Folder

      3 Creating and Selecting a Folder Selecting a Folder Select a folder on the folder selection Lowest file number screen, then press <0>. Number of images in folder The folder where the captured images will be saved is selected. Subsequently captured images will be recorded into the selected folder.

    • Page 211: File Numbering Methods

      File Numbering Methods The captured images are assigned a IMG_0001.JPG (Example) sequential four-digit file number from 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can File number change how the file number is assigned. Select [File numbering]. Under the [51] tab, select [File numbering], then press <0>.

    • Page 212
      3 File Numbering Methods Continuous When you wish to continue the file numbering sequence even after the card is replaced or a new folder is created. Even after you replace the card or create a new folder, the file numbering continues in sequence up to 9999. This is useful when you want to save images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or in multiple folders into one folder on a computer.
    • Page 213: Auto Reset

      3 File Numbering Methods Auto Reset When you wish to restart the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is replaced or a new folder is created. When you replace the card or create a folder, the file numbering restarts from 0001 for the new images saved.

    • Page 214: Setting Copyright Information

      Setting Copyright InformationN When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image as Exif information. Select [Copyright information]. Under the [55] tab, select [Copyright information], then press <0>. Select the item to be set. Select [Enter author’s name] or [Enter copyright details], then press <0>.

    • Page 215
      3 Setting Copyright InformationN Checking the Copyright Information When you select [Display copyright info.] in step 2, you can check the [Author] and [Copyright] information that you entered. Deleting the Copyright Information When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright] information.
    • Page 217: Gps Settings

      GPS Settings This chapter describes the camera’s built-in GPS settings. The EOS 6D Mark II can receive satellite navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia), and Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) “Michibiki” (Japan). The GPS function is set to [Disable] by default.

    • Page 218: Gps Features

      GPS Features Geotagging Images Geotag information* (latitude, longitude, elevation) and coordinated universal time* can be appended to images. Shooting locations of geotagged images can be displayed on a map on a computer. *1: Certain traveling conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag information to be added to images.

    • Page 219
      GPS Features Viewing Images and Information on a Virtual Map With Map Utility (EOS software, p.595), you can view the shooting locations and the route traveled on a map displayed on a computer. Map data ©2017 ZENRIN…
    • Page 220: Gps Precautions

      To avoid violating GPS function regulations, visit the Canon Web site to check where the use is allowed. Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from GPS function use in other countries and regions. Model Number…

    • Page 221: Acquiring Gps Signals

      Acquiring GPS Signals To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping your hands, etc. away from the camera top. When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera approx.

    • Page 222
      Acquiring GPS Signals GPS Acquisition Status The GPS acquisition status is indicated by the [r] icon displayed on the camera’s LCD panel. Constant r: Signal acquired Blinking r: Signal not acquired yet When you shoot while [r] is constantly displayed, the image will be geotagged.
    • Page 223
      Acquiring GPS Signals Poor GPS Coverage Under the following conditions, the GPS satellite signal will not be properly acquired. As a result, the geotag information may not be recorded or inaccurate geotag information may be recorded. Indoors, underground, in tunnels or forests, between buildings, or in valleys.
    • Page 224
      Acquiring GPS Signals Viewing GPS Information Check the [GPS] setting. Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2]. Select [GPS information display]. The GPS information will be displayed. Take the picture. When you shoot after GPS signal acquisition, the image will be geotagged.
    • Page 225
      Acquiring GPS Signals Geotagging Information Play back the images and press the <B> button to display the shooting information screen (p.392). Then tilt <9> up or down to check the geotag information. Latitude Longitude Elevation UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) When you shoot a movie, the GPS information at the time when shooting begins is recorded.
    • Page 226: Setting The Positioning Interval

      Setting the Positioning Interval The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set. Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will record more accurate location information, it will reduce the number of possible shots because it will drain the battery faster. Check the [GPS] setting.

    • Page 227: Setting Time From Gps On The Camera

      Setting Time from GPS on the Camera The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set on the camera. The margin of error is approx. ±1 sec. Check the [GPS] setting. Check that [GPS] is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].

    • Page 228: Logging The Route Traveled

      Logging the Route Traveled When using the GPS logging function, the geotag information of the route the camera travels is automatically recorded in the camera’s internal memory. With Map Utility (EOS software, p.595), you can view the shooting locations and the route traveled on a map displayed on a computer.

    • Page 229
      Logging the Route Traveled Geotag Information Logs Geotag information for the route the camera travels is recorded at the intervals set with [Position update intvl] (p.226). The log data is saved in the camera’s internal memory by date. The table below shows how many days’…
    • Page 230
      Logging the Route Traveled Downloading Log Data to a Computer The log data in the camera’s internal memory can be downloaded to a computer with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) or downloaded from a card after transferring the data to the card. When you use Map Utility (EOS software, p.595) to open a log file saved on the computer, the camera’s travel route will be displayed on a map.
    • Page 231
      Logging the Route Traveled The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera body. For this reason, even when carrying the camera, such as in a bag, try to keep the top of the camera facing upwards, and do not place anything on top of it. Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible.
    • Page 233: Advanced Operations For Photographic Effects

      Advanced Operations for Photographic Effects In Creative Zone modes, you can change various settings of the camera as you desire to obtain a wide variety of shooting results, by selecting the shutter speed and/or aperture, adjusting the exposure as you prefer, etc. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>).

    • Page 234: D: Program Ae

      d: Program AE The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE. * <d> stands for Program. * AE stands for Auto Exposure. Set the Mode Dial to <d>. Focus on the subject. Look through the viewfinder and aim the AF point over the subject.

    • Page 235: Program Shift

      d: Program AE If the “30″” shutter speed and the lowest f/number blink, it indicates underexposure. Increase the ISO speed or use flash. If the “4000” shutter speed and the highest f/number blink, it indicates overexposure. Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold separately) to reduce the amount of light entering the lens.

    • Page 236: S: Shutter-Priority Ae

      s: Shutter-Priority AE In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of motion.

    • Page 237
      s: Shutter-Priority AE If the lowest f/number blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher ISO speed. If the highest f/number blinks, it indicates overexposure. Turn the <6>…
    • Page 238: F: Aperture-Priority Ae

      f: Aperture-Priority AE In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure matching the subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and background fall within acceptable focus.

    • Page 239
      f: Aperture-Priority AE If the “30″” shutter speed blinks, it indicates underexposure. Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower f/ number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or set a higher ISO speed. If the “4000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates overexposure.
    • Page 240: Depth-Of-Field Preview

      f: Aperture-Priority AE Depth-of-Field PreviewN The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open. Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow (shallow). Press the depth-of-field preview button to stop down the lens to the current aperture setting and check the depth of…

    • Page 241: A: Manual Exposure

      a: Manual Exposure In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This method is called manual exposure. * <a>…

    • Page 242
      a: Manual Exposure Exposure Compensation with ISO Auto If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO) for manual exposure shooting, you can set exposure compensation (p.245) as follows: [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] Under [8C.Fn III-4: Custom Controls], with [ : Expo comp (hold btn, turn )] (p.502).
    • Page 243: Selecting The Metering Mode

      q Selecting the Metering ModeN You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness. In Basic Zone modes, evaluative metering is set automatically. (In the <8: y> mode, center-weighted average metering is set automatically.) Press the <q> button Select the metering mode.

    • Page 244: Spot Metering

      q Selecting the Metering ModeN Spot metering Effective when metering a specific part of the subject or scene. Spot metering covers approx. 3.2% of the viewfinder area at the center. The spot metering circle will be displayed in the viewfinder. Center-weighted average metering The metering is averaged for the entire scene with the viewfinder center weighted more heavily.

    • Page 245: O Setting The Desired Exposure Compensation

      O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken (decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera. Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f> shooting modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3-stop increments for viewfinder shooting, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel can display the setting only up to ±3 stops.

    • Page 246
      O Setting the Desired Exposure CompensationN For Live View and movie shooting, the exposure compensation can be set only up to ±3 stops. If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.194) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure compensation for a darker image is set.
    • Page 247: Auto Exposure Bracketing (Aeb)

      h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N By changing the shutter speed, aperture, or ISO speed automatically, you can bracket the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three consecutive shots. This is called AEB. * AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing. Select [Expo.comp./AEB].

    • Page 248
      h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.194) is set to any setting other than [Disable], the effect of AEB may be reduced. During AEB shooting, <A> will blink in the viewfinder. If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three times for each shot.
    • Page 249: A Locking The Exposure For Shooting (Ae Lock)

      A Locking the Exposure for Shooting (AE Lock)N You can lock the exposure when you want to set the focus and exposure separately or when you are to take multiple shots at the same exposure setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and take the picture.

    • Page 250: F: Long (Bulb) Exposures

      F: Long (Bulb) Exposures In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter button. This photographic technique is called “bulb exposure”. Use bulb exposures for night scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long exposures.

    • Page 251: Bulb Timer

      F: Long (Bulb) Exposures With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise generated during long exposures (p.197). For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended. You can also use mirror lockup (p.265) in combination. You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately, p.276).

    • Page 252
      F: Long (Bulb) Exposures Set the desired exposure time. Select the hour, minute, or second. Press <0> so <r> is displayed. Set the desired number, then press <0>. (Returns to <s>.) Select [OK]. The set time will be displayed on the menu screen.
    • Page 253: W: Hdr (High Dynamic Range) Shooting

      w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN You can shoot still photos with clipped highlights and shadows reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even in high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for landscape and still-life shots. With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured consecutively for each shot and then merged together automatically.

    • Page 254
      w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN Effects P: Natural For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and shadow details would otherwise be lost. Clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced. A: Art standard While the clipped highlights and shadows will be reduced more than with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to have the picture look like a painting.
    • Page 255
      w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN Set [Continuous HDR]. Select either [1 shot only] or [Every shot], then press <0>. With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends. With [Every shot], HDR shooting continues until the setting in step 2 is set to [Disable HDR].
    • Page 256
      w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN You cannot select RAW or RAW+JPEG image quality. The HDR mode cannot be set if RAW or RAW+JPEG is set. HDR shooting is not possible with expanded ISO speeds (L, H1, H2). HDR shooting is possible within ISO 100 — ISO 40000 (varies depending on the settings of [Minimum] and [Maximum] for [ISO speed range]).
    • Page 257
      w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], AF point display information (p.397) and Dust Delete Data (p.452) will not be appended to the image. If you perform handheld HDR shooting with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable], image periphery will be slightly trimmed and resolution will be slightly lowered.
    • Page 258: P Multiple Exposures

      P Multiple ExposuresN You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. With Live View shooting (p.289), you can see in real time how the exposures are merged when you shoot multiple-exposure images. Select [Multiple exposure]. Under the [z3] tab, select [Multiple exposure], then press <0>.

    • Page 259
      P Multiple ExposuresN Set the [No. of exposures]. Select the number of exposures, then press <0>. You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures. Set [Continue Mult-exp]. Select either [1 shot only] or [Continuously], then press <0>. With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure shooting will be canceled automatically after the shooting ends.
    • Page 260
      P Multiple ExposuresN Shoot subsequent exposures. The captured image combining the multiple exposures will be displayed. When you perform Live View shooting, the multiple-exposure images merged so far will be displayed. By pressing the <B> button, you can display only the Live View image.
    • Page 261
      P Multiple ExposuresN For multiple-exposure shooting, the settings will be automatically switched to [Disable] for the following: all the items of [z1: Lens aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3: Highlight tone priority]. If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for shooting.
    • Page 262
      P Multiple ExposuresN Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card You can select a 1 image recorded on the card as the first single exposure. The image data of the selected 1 image will remain intact. You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or JPEG images.
    • Page 263
      P Multiple ExposuresN You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single exposure. If you select [Deselect img], the image selection for the first image will be canceled. Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting Before you finish shooting the set number of exposures, you can press the <x>…
    • Page 264
      P Multiple ExposuresN Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality? All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41 or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure image will be saved as a 1 image. Image Quality Setting Merged Multiple-Exposure JPEG JPEG 41/61…
    • Page 265: Mirror Lockup

      2 Mirror LockupN Camera vibrations caused by the mirror’s reflex action when the picture is taken is called “mirror shock”. Mirror lockup keeps the mirror up before and during exposure to reduce blur caused by camera vibrations. Useful when shooting close-ups (macro photography), using a super telephoto lens, shooting at slow shutter speeds, etc.

    • Page 266
      2 Mirror LockupN Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day, take the picture promptly after mirror lockup is stabilized.
    • Page 267: H Interval Timer Shooting

      H Interval Timer Shooting With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval until the set number of shots are taken. Select [Interval timer]. Under the [z4] tab (the [z1] tab in Basic Zone modes), select [Interval timer], then press <0>.

    • Page 268
      H Interval Timer Shooting Select [OK]. Number of shots Shooting interval The interval timer settings will be displayed on the menu screen. When you exit the menu, <H> will be displayed on the LCD panel. Take the picture. First shot is taken and shooting continues according to the interval timer settings.
    • Page 269
      H Interval Timer Shooting Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot when focus is not achieved.
    • Page 270: Using The Eyepiece Cover

      Using the Eyepiece Cover When you take a picture without looking through the viewfinder, such as when you use the self-timer, bulb exposure, or a remote switch, stray light entering the viewfinder may cause the picture to look dark (underexposed). To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.38) attached to the camera strap.

    • Page 271: Remote Control Shooting

      Remote Control Shooting You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (with infrared control, sold separately) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (with Bluetooth, sold separately) for remote control shooting. Remote Controller RC-6 (Sold Separately) You can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/ 16.4 feet away from the camera.

    • Page 272
      Remote Control Shooting Press the remote controller’s release (transmit) button. Point the remote controller toward the camera’s remote control sensor, then press the release (transmit) button. The self-timer/remote control lamp Remote lights up and the picture is taken. control sensor If you select <q>…
    • Page 273: Pairing

      Remote Control Shooting Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (Sold Separately) Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately) compatible with ® Bluetooth low energy technology enables remote control shooting up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet from the camera. To use the BR-E1, you must first pair the camera and remote controller so they recognize each other.

    • Page 274
      Remote Control Shooting Select [Pairing]. Select [Pairing], then press <0>. Press and hold the <W> button and <T> button on the BR-E1 simultaneously for 3 sec. or more. Pairing starts. For instructions after the pairing is complete, refer to the BR-E1’s Instruction Manual.
    • Page 275
      Remote Control Shooting Canceling the Pairing To pair the camera with another Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately), clear the paring (registration) with the current remote controller. You can check the connection status of the camera and remote controller on the [Check/clear connection info] screen in step Select [Wireless communication settings].
    • Page 276: Using A Remote Switch

      Using a Remote Switch You can connect any EOS accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal such as the Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (each sold separately) to shoot with the camera (p.515). To operate the accessory, refer to its Instruction Manual. Open the terminal cover.

    • Page 277: Flash Photography

      Flash Photography This chapter describes how to shoot with external EX- series Speedlites (sold separately) and how to set Speedlite settings on the camera’s menu screen.

    • Page 278: D Flash Photography

      D Flash Photography EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites Using an EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) makes flash photography easy. For operation procedures, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s Instruction Manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all the features of EX-series Speedlites. To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions on the camera’s menu screen, see pages 281-287.

    • Page 279
      If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary. Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
    • Page 280
      1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. Cautions for Live View Shooting If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z5: Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.303). The flash will not be fired if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
    • Page 281: Setting The Flash Function

      Setting the Flash FunctionN With an EX-series Speedlite having compatible flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to set the Speedlite’s functions and Custom Functions. Attach the Speedlite to the camera and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual.

    • Page 282
      3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Flash Sync. Speed in Av Mode You can set the flash-sync speed for flash photography in the <f> aperture- priority AE mode. : Auto The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/180 sec.
    • Page 283: Flash Function Settings

      3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Flash Function Settings The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom Function settings, etc. For details on the Speedlite’s functions, refer to the Speedlite’s Instruction Manual. Sample display Wireless functions / Flash ratio control Flash zoom…

    • Page 284
      3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Wireless functions / Flash ratio control Wireless (multiple) flash photography is possible with radio or optical transmission. For details on wireless flash, refer to the Instruction Manual of a Speedlite compatible with wireless flash photography. With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.) compatible with flash function settings, you can set the flash ratio between flash…
    • Page 285
      3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Shutter synchronization Normally, set this to [First-curtain synchronization] so that the flash fires immediately after the exposure starts. If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will be fired right before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.
    • Page 286: Settings

      3 Setting the Flash FunctionN When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25 sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain synchronization] is set. With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings, you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and [Flash exposure compensation] under [Flash function settings].

    • Page 287
      3 Setting the Flash FunctionN Clearing Flash Function Settings / Flash C.Fn Settings Select [Clear settings]. Select the settings to be cleared. Select [Clear flash settings] or [Clear all Speedlite C.Fn’s], then press <0>. On the confirmation dialog, select [OK]. Then the flash settings or Custom Function settings will all be cleared.
    • Page 289: Shooting) With The Lcd Monitor

      Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting) You can shoot while viewing the image on the camera’s LCD monitor. This is called “Live View shooting”. Live View shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting/ Movie shooting switch to <A>. If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the LCD monitor, camera shake may cause blurred images.

    • Page 290: A Shooting With The Lcd Monitor

      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <A>. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. The Live View image will be displayed in the brightness level closely matching that of the actual image to be captured.

    • Page 291
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Enabling Live View Shooting Set [z4: Live View shoot.] (under the [z1] tab in Basic Zone modes) to [Enable]. Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting (Approx. number of shots) Room Temperature Low Temperatures Temperature (23°C / 73°F) (0°C / 32°F)
    • Page 292
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. In the <8: y> mode, Live View shooting is not possible. In the <8: q>…
    • Page 293
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Information Display Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change. Maximum burst Battery level Temperature warning Possible shots/Seconds remaining on self-timer Number of remaining multiple exposures HDR shooting/ AF point (Live 1-point AF) Multiple exposures/ Multi Shot Noise Electronic level…
    • Page 294
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Warnings Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns.
    • Page 295
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Scene Icons In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. Subject Portrait Non-portrait…
    • Page 296
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor *3: The icon of the scene selected from the detectable scenes will be displayed. *4: Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
    • Page 297
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Final Image Simulation Final image simulation is a function that shows the Live View image with the effects of the current settings for Picture Style, white balance, and other shooting functions applied. The Live View image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below.
    • Page 298
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor B Button Display Options You can set the information to be displayed on the image for when you press the <B> button during Live View shooting or movie shooting. Select [zbutton LV display options]. Under the [54] tab, select [zbutton LV display options], then press <0>.
    • Page 299
      A Shooting with the LCD Monitor Edit the options. Select what you want to be displayed and press <0> to add a checkmark [X]. For the information you do not want to be displayed, press <0> to remove the checkmark [X]. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
    • Page 300: Shooting Function Settings

      Shooting Function Settings f/R/i/q Settings When the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <f>, <R>, <i>, or <q> button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the respective shooting function.

    • Page 301
      Shooting Function Settings Q Quick Control With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, you can press the <Q> button and set the following functions. In Creative Zone modes, the following can be set: AF method, AF operation, Drive mode, Metering mode, Image quality, White balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer.
    • Page 302: Menu Function Settings

      Menu Function Settings With Live View shooting, menu options exclusive to Live View shooting will appear under the [z5] tab (the [z2] tab in Basic Zone modes). The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings are disabled).

    • Page 303: Exposure Simulation

      3 Menu Function Settings Exposure simulationN Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness (exposure) of the actual image will look. • Enable (g) The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.

    • Page 304
      (regardless of the [Silent LV shoot.] setting). When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not be fired if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
    • Page 305: Selecting The Af Operation

      Selecting the AF OperationN You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting conditions or subject. In Basic Zone modes, the optimum AF operation is set automatically for the respective shooting mode. Press the <f> button. Select the AF operation. Press the <Y>…

    • Page 306
      Selecting the AF OperationN One-Shot AF for Still Subjects Suited for still subjects. When you press the shutter button halfway, the camera will focus only once. When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn green and the beeper will sound. The focus remains locked while you hold down the shutter button halfway, allowing you to recompose the image before taking the picture.
    • Page 307
      Selecting the AF OperationN Servo AF for Moving Subjects This AF operation is suited for moving subjects. While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously. When focus is achieved, the AF point will turn blue. The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
    • Page 308: Focusing With Af (Af Method)

      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Selecting the AF Method You can set the AF method to [u+Tracking] (p.309), [Smooth zone] (p.311), or [Live 1-point AF] (p.313) to suit the shooting conditions and subject. If you want to focus manually, set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.321).

    • Page 309
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) u(face)+Tracking: c The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the AF point <p> also moves to track the face. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
    • Page 310
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Take the picture. Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290). Focusing on a subject other than a human face • Tap on the subject (or spot) where you want to focus. •…
    • Page 311
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Smooth Zone: o Focus can be achieved with a larger area (Zone AF frame) than the AF point of [Live 1-point AF] (p.313). Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
    • Page 312
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Take the picture. Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290). If the camera does not focus on the target subject, switch to [Live 1-point AF] (p.313) and focus again.
    • Page 313
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Live 1-point AF: d The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you want to focus on a particular subject. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.
    • Page 314
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Take the picture. Check the focus and exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290). During movie shooting, if [z4: Movie Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF point will be displayed larger in step 1.
    • Page 315
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Notes for AF AF Operation Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway will focus again. The image brightness may change during and after the AF operation. Depending on the subject and shooting conditions, it may take longer to focus, or the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
    • Page 316
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are clipped. Subjects in low light. Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the horizontal direction.
    • Page 317: Magnified View

      Focusing with AF (AF Method) Magnified View When the AF method is [Smooth zone] or [Live 1-point AF] mode, either press the <u> button or tap on [d] displayed on the bottom right of the screen. You can magnify the image by approx. 5x or 10x and check the focus.

    • Page 318
      Focusing with AF (AF Method) If focusing is difficult in the magnified view, return to the normal view and perform AF. If you perform AF in the normal view and then use the magnified view, accurate focus may not be achieved. AF speed differs between normal view and magnified view.
    • Page 319: Shooting With The Touch Shutter

      x Shooting with the Touch Shutter Just by tapping on the LCD monitor screen, you can focus and take the picture automatically. Display the Live View image. Press the <0> button. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor. Enable the Touch Shutter.

    • Page 320
      x Shooting with the Touch Shutter Even if you set the drive mode to <o> or <i>, the camera will still shoot in the single shooting mode. Even if [AF operation] is set to [Servo AF], tapping on the screen will focus on the image with [One-Shot AF].
    • Page 321: Mf: Focusing Manually

      MF: Focusing Manually You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus). Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF>. Turn the lens focusing ring to focus roughly. Display the magnifying frame. Press the <u> button or tap on [d] on the lower right of the screen.

    • Page 322: Manual Focusing

      MF: Focusing Manually Focus manually. While looking at the magnified image, turn the lens focusing ring to focus. After achieving focus, press the <u> button to return to the normal view. Take the picture. Check the exposure, then press the shutter button completely to take the picture (p.290).

    • Page 323
      General Live View Shooting Cautions Image Quality When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and banding) may become noticeable. Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in the image. If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may deteriorate.
    • Page 324
      General Live View Shooting Cautions Live View Image Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect the brightness of the captured image. Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed Live View image under low light.
    • Page 325: Shooting Movies

      Shooting Movies Movie shooting is enabled by setting the Live View shooting/ Movie shooting switch to <k>. Before shooting movies, see page 343 and make sure the card is able to record movies at the desired movie- recording quality setting. If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera shake can cause blurred movies.

    • Page 326: Shooting Movies

      k Shooting Movies Autoexposure Shooting When the shooting mode is set to <A>, <C>, <d>, <s>, <f>, or <F>, autoexposure control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <k>. The Live View image will appear on the LCD monitor.

    • Page 327
      k Shooting Movies ISO Speed in the <A> and <C> Modes The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 — ISO 25600. ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and < > Modes The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 — ISO 25600. Under [z2: k ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO Auto] to [Max.:H2 (102400)] (p.372), the maximum limit of the automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO…
    • Page 328
      k Shooting Movies Cautions for the <A>, <C>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes In the <A> and <C> modes, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.329). You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A>…
    • Page 329
      k Shooting Movies Scene Icons In the <A> and <C> modes, the camera detects the scene type and sets the exposure automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. Non-Portrait Subject Background Portrait…
    • Page 330: Shooting

      k Shooting Movies Manual Exposure Shooting You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for advanced users. Set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch to <k>. Set the Mode Dial to <a>. Set the ISO speed.

    • Page 331
      k Shooting Movies ISO Speed in the <a> Mode With [AUTO] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 — ISO 25600. Under [z2:k ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO Auto] to [Max.:H2 (102400)] (p.372), the maximum limit of the automatic ISO speed setting range will be expanded to H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
    • Page 332
      k Shooting Movies For movie shooting, the ISO speed cannot be expanded to L (equivalent to ISO 50). When switching from still photo shooting to movie shooting, check the camera settings again before shooting movies. During movie shooting, avoid changing the shutter speed or aperture. Doing so may record the changes in the exposure or create more noise at high ISO speeds.
    • Page 333: Still Photo Shooting

      k Shooting Movies Settable Shutter Speeds The settable shutter speeds in the <a> manual exposure shooting mode vary depending on the frame rate of the movie recording quality. (sec.) Frame Rate Shutter Speed 1/4000 — 1/60 1/4000 — 1/50 1/4000 — 1/30 1/4000 — 1/25 The settable shutter speeds will differ for time-lapse movie shooting (p.349).

    • Page 334
      k Shooting Movies Information Display Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change. Movie shooting mode/Scene icon • : Autoexposure (A/C) • : Autoexposure (d/s/f/F) • : Manual exposure (a) • u : HDR movie shooting (8) •…
    • Page 335
      k Shooting Movies When the [z4: AF method] is [Smooth zone] or [Live 1-point AF], you can press the <B> button to display the electronic level (p.80). You can set what is displayed for when you press the <B> button (p.298).
    • Page 336
      k Shooting Movies Cautions for Movie Shooting Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. If you shoot something that has fine detail, moire or false colors may result.
    • Page 337
      k Shooting Movies Warnings Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause skin redness or blistering due to low-temperature contact burns.
    • Page 338
      k Shooting Movies Final Image Simulation Final image simulation is a function that shows the movie as it will look with the current settings for the Picture Style, white balance and other shooting functions applied. During movie shooting, the image will automatically reflect the function settings listed below.
    • Page 339: Shooting Function Settings

      Shooting Function Settings f/i Settings With the image displayed on the LCD monitor, if you press the <f> or <i> button, the setting screen will appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> dial to set the respective function. During manual-exposure shooting (p.330), you can press the <i>…

    • Page 340
      Shooting Function Settings Select a function and set it. Press the <W> <X> keys to select a function. The settings of the selected function and Feature guide will appear on the screen. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it. To set the white balance correction or Picture Style parameters, press the <B>…
    • Page 341: Setting The Movie Recording Quality

      Setting the Movie Recording Quality With [z1: Movie rec. size], you can set the movie recording quality (image size, frame rate, and compression method). The movie will be recorded as an MP4 file. The frame rate displayed on the [z1: Movie rec.

    • Page 342
      3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality Frame rate (fps: frame per second) 8 59.94fps/6 29.97fps For areas where the TV system is NTSC (North America, Japan, South Korea, Mexico, etc.). 7 50.00 fps/5 25.00 fps For areas where the TV system is PAL (Europe, Russia, China, Australia, etc.).
    • Page 343
      3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality Cards that Can Record Movies When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a writing/reading speed (required card performance) shown in the table below or higher than the standard specification. Test the card by taking a few movies in the desired quality (p.341) and make sure the card can properly record the movie.
    • Page 344
      3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality To obtain better performance with the card, formatting the card with the camera before shooting movies is recommended (p.75). To check the card’s writing/reading speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s Web site, etc. For bit rates, see page 574. Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute Normal movie (Approx.)
    • Page 345
      3 Setting the Movie Recording Quality Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting without interruption (except the time-lapse movie shooting). Using SD/SDHC cards formatted with the camera If you use the camera to format an SD/SDHC card, the camera will format it in FAT32.
    • Page 346: Setting The Sound Recording

      Setting the Sound Recording You can shoot movies while recording sound with the built-in stereo microphones or an external stereo microphone. You can also freely adjust the sound-recording level. Use [z1: Sound recording] to set sound recording functions. Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level Auto : The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically.

    • Page 347: Microphone

      3 Setting the Sound Recording Attenuator Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or [Manual] for shooting, sound distortion may still result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case, setting it to [Enable] is recommended.

    • Page 348: Shooting Hdr Movies

      Shooting HDR Movies If you set the Mode Dial to <8>, you can shoot movies with clipped highlights reduced for a high dynamic range of tones even in high- contrast scenes. HDR movie will be recorded in L6X (NTSC) or L5X (PAL).

    • Page 349: Shooting Time-Lapse Movies

      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Still photos shot at a set interval can be stitched together automatically to create a 4K or Full HD time-lapse movie. A time-lapse movie shows how a subject changes in a much shorter period of time than the actual time it took.

    • Page 350: Recording Size

      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Select the desired movie recording size. Select [EnableH (3840×2160)] or [EnableL (1920×1080)]. EnableH (3840×2160) The movie is recorded in 4K quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9. The frame rate of the recorded movie is 29.97fps (6) for NTSC and 25.00fps (5) for PAL, and its recording format is Motion JPEG (J) and its movie file format is MOV (D).

    • Page 351
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Set the shooting interval. Select [Interval]. Check the [k Time required] and [3: Playback time] displayed at the bottom of the screen to set the number. Select the hour, minute, or second. Time required Playback time Press <0>…
    • Page 352
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Select the exposure’s setting method. Select [Auto exposure]. Fixed 1st frame When taking the first shot, metering is performed to set the exposure automatically to match the brightness. The exposure setting for the first shot will be applied to subsequent shots. Other shooting-related settings for the first shot will also be applied for subsequent shots.
    • Page 353
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Set the beeper. Select [Beep as img taken]. If [Disable] is set, the beeper will not sound for shooting. Check the settings. Time required Playback time Time required Indicates the time required to shoot the set number of shots with the set interval.
    • Page 354
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Read the message. Read the message and select [OK]. Take test shots. As with Live View shooting, set the exposure and shooting functions, then press the shutter button halfway to focus. Press the shutter button completely to take test shots.
    • Page 355
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Press the <0> button. The camera will be ready to start shooting a time-lapse movie. To return to step 13, press the <0> button again. Shoot the time-lapse movie. Number of shots Press the <B> button and check again the “Time required”…
    • Page 356
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Using a tripod is recommended. Taking test shots for still photos as in step 14 and shooting test movies for time-lapse movies beforehand is recommended. Regardless of the [z1: Movie rec. size] setting, 4K time-lapse movies are recorded in H6J(NTSC)/H5J(PAL), while Full HD time-lapse movies are recorded in L 6 W(NTSC)/L 5 W(PAL).
    • Page 357
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components. If the camera is connected to a computer with the interface cable (sold separately), or if an HDMI cable is connected to the camera, you cannot select [Enable].
    • Page 358
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies If a shutter speed longer than the shooting interval such as when the long exposure is set, or if a slow shutter speed is set automatically, the camera may not be able to shoot at the set interval. Also, shooting may not be performed when the shutter speed and the shooting interval are nearly the same.
    • Page 359
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies When time-lapse movie shooting ends, the settings are cleared automatically, and the camera returns to normal movie shooting. Note that if you set a slow shutter speed for time-lapse movie shooting and the settings are automatically cleared, the shutter speed may be automatically changed to a speed within the settable range for normal movie shooting.
    • Page 360
      a Shooting Time-lapse Movies You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273) to start and stop the time- lapse movie shooting. Set [z5: Remote control] to [Disable] beforehand. With Remote Controller RC-6 Camera Status/ <o>…
    • Page 361: Shooting Video Snapshots

      Shooting Video Snapshots You can shoot a series of short movie clips lasting approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. called video snapshots. The video snapshots can be joined together into a single movie called a video snapshot album. You can thereby show short and quick highlights of a trip or event.

    • Page 362
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Select [Album settings]. Select [Create a new album]. Select [Snapshot length]. Set the snapshot length. Select the desired snapshot length, then press <0>. Select [OK]. Exit the menu. Press the <M> button to exit the menu. A blue bar will appear to indicate the snapshot length.
    • Page 363
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Creating a Video Snapshot Album Shoot the first video snapshot. Press the <0> button, then shoot. The blue bar indicating the shooting duration will gradually decrease. After the set shooting duration elapses, the shooting stops automatically. The confirmation screen will appear (p.364-365).
    • Page 364
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Options in Steps 10 and 11 Function Description The movie clip will be saved as the video JSave as album (Step 10) snapshot album’s first video snapshot. The video snapshot just recorded will be added to the album recorded immediately JAdd to album (Step 11) before.
    • Page 365
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots [1 Playback video snapshot] Operations in Steps 10 and 11 Function Playback Description By pressing <0>, you can play back or pause the video 7 Play snapshot recorded immediately before. Displays the first scene of the album’s first video 5 First frame snapshot.
    • Page 366
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Adding to an Existing Album Select [Add to existing album]. Follow step 5 on page 362 to select [Add to existing album], then press <0>. Select an existing album. Turn the <5> dial to select an existing album, then press <0>.
    • Page 367
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Cautions for Shooting Video Snapshots You can add to an album only the video snapshots with the same duration (approx. 2 sec., 4 sec., or 8 sec. each). Note that if you do any of the following while shooting video snapshots, a new album will be created for subsequent video snapshots.
    • Page 368
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Playing Back an Album You can play back a video snapshot album in the same way as a normal movie (p.419). Play back the movie. Press the <x> button to display an image. Select the album. In the single-image display, the [st] icon displayed on the upper left of the screen indicates a video…
    • Page 369
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Editing an Album After shooting, you can rearrange, delete, or play back the video snapshots in the album. Select [X]. On the movie playback panel displayed, select [X] (Edit), then press <0>. The editing screen will be displayed. Select an editing operation.
    • Page 370
      3 Shooting Video Snapshots Save the edited album. Press the <M> button to return to the Editing panel at the screen bottom. Select [W] (Save), then press <0>. The save screen will appear. To save it as a new album, select [New file].
    • Page 371: Menu Function Settings

      Menu Function Settings When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to <k>, some menu options under the [z1] tab will be switched to movie shooting items. Movie recording size You can set the movie recording quality (image size, frame rate, and compression method).

    • Page 372
      3 Menu Function Settings kISO speed settingsN ISO speed In the <a> mode, you can set the ISO speed manually. You can also select ISO Auto. You can also use the <i> button for these settings. ISO speed range For movie shooting, you can set the manual ISO speed setting range (minimum and maximum limits).
    • Page 373: Movie Servo Af

      3 Menu Function Settings When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z4] tab will be displayed as the menu options exclusive to movie shooting. (In Basic Zone modes, it will be the [z2] tab.) Movie Servo AF With this function enabled, the camera focuses on the subject continuously during movie shooting.

    • Page 374
      3 Menu Function Settings When [Disable] is set: Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to focus. Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable] Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult • A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera. •…
    • Page 375: Sensitivity

      3 Menu Function Settings Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivityN You can change the Movie Servo AF’s tracking sensitivity to one of seven levels. This affects the responsiveness of AF tracking sensitivity when the subject strays from the AF points, such as during panning or when an obstacle cuts across the AF points.

    • Page 376: Movie Servo Af Speed

      * Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting USM and STM lenses released in and after 2009 are compatible. For details, refer to the Canon Web site. With certain lenses, even if the AF speed is adjusted, the speed may not change.

    • Page 377
      3 Menu Function Settings Metering timerN You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock time). Grid display With [3×3 l] or [6×4 m], you can display grid lines to help you level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3×3+diag n], the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the subject.
    • Page 378
      3 Menu Function Settings V button function You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button halfway or completely during movie shooting. Setting Pressing halfway Pressing completely Metering and AF No function Metering only No function Metering and AF Starts/stops movie shooting Metering only Starts/stops movie shooting…
    • Page 379
      3 Menu Function Settings When the Live View shooting/Movie shooting switch is set to <k>, the [z5] tab will be displayed as the menu options exclusive to movie shooting. (In Basic Zone modes, it will be the [z3] tab.) Video snapshot You can shoot video snapshots.
    • Page 380
      (the subject momentarily looks out of focus) due to the effects of the Movie digital IS. When using a TS-E lens, fish-eye lens, or non-Canon lens, setting Movie digital IS to [Disable] is recommended. The effect of Movie digital IS will not be reflected in any magnified image.
    • Page 381: Remote Control Shooting

      3 Menu Function Settings Remote control shooting When [Enable] is set, you can start or stop movie shooting using Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.271) or Wireless Remote Control BR-E1 (sold separately, p.273). • When using Remote Controller RC-6 Set the switch to the <2> position, then press the transmit button. If the switch is set to <o>…

    • Page 382
      3 Menu Function Settings General Movie Shooting Cautions Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icon If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a red <E> icon will appear. The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated automatically.
    • Page 383
      3 Menu Function Settings General Movie Shooting Cautions Recording and Image Quality If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five- level indicator may appear on the right of the screen during movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the internal buffer memory).
    • Page 387: Image Playback

      Image Playback This chapter describes how to play back and erase the captured images (still photos/movies), how to view them on a TV screen, and other playback-related functions. Images shot and saved with another device The camera may not be able to properly display images captured with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their file names changed.

    • Page 388: Image Playback

      x Image Playback Single-Image Display Play back the image. Press the <x> button. The last image captured or played back will appear. Select an image. To play back images starting with the last image captured, turn the <5> dial counterclockwise. To play back images starting with the first captured image, turn the dial clockwise.

    • Page 389
      x Image Playback Exit the image playback. Press the <x> button to exit the image playback and return to shooting-ready state. When RAW images shot with [z4: Aspect ratio] set to an option other than [3:2] (p.168) are played back, frame lines indicating the image area will be displayed.
    • Page 390
      x Image Playback 3 Grid Display In the single-image display, you can overlay the grid on the image playback. With [33: Playback grid], you can select [3×3 l], [6×4 m], or [3×3+diag This function is convenient for checking the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt as well as composition.
    • Page 391: B: Shooting Information Display

      B: Shooting Information Display Sample Information for Still Photos Basic information display Bluetooth function Eye-Fi transfer completed Wi-Fi function Rating Wi-Fi signal strength/ Eye-Fi transmission status Protect images Battery level Playback No./ Folder number — Total images/ File numbering Number of found images Shutter speed Image-recording…

    • Page 392
      B: Shooting Information Display Shooting information display • Detailed Information for Creative Zone Mode Images Aperture Exposure compensation amount Histogram (Brightness/RGB) Shooting date and time ISO speed Shutter speed Highlight tone priority Scroll bar Shooting mode/ Multiple exposure/ Metering mode Time-lapse movie: Test shots White balance…
    • Page 393
      B: Shooting Information Display • Detailed Information for Basic Zone Mode Images Level of the Ambience ambience effect Background blur Level of blurred motion effect Brightness Color tone * [Brightness] indicator is displayed for images whose brightness was adjusted for shooting.
    • Page 394
      B: Shooting Information Display Lens / Histogram information • Histogram (Brightness) Lens name Histogram (RGB) Focal length White balance information • Picture Style information 1 Picture Style information 2 • •…
    • Page 395: Gps Information

      B: Shooting Information Display Color space / • Noise reduction information Lens aberration • correction information GPS information • Latitude Longitude Elevation UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) The GPS information screen is not displayed when GPS information is not recorded to the images. Even if you use the camera to play back an image taken by another camera (with GPS information recorded), the GPS information will not be displayed.

    • Page 396
      B: Shooting Information Display Sample Movie Information Display Move playback/Video snapshot playback Aperture Shutter speed ISO speed Movie shooting mode/ HDR movie/ HDR movie (in 8 Movie digital IS modes)/ Time-lapse movie/ Video snapshot File size Recording time Movie recording format Movie recording size Compression rate/ Movie recording method…
    • Page 397
      B: Shooting Information Display Highlight alert When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed, clipped highlights will blink. To obtain more detailed gradation in the blinking areas where you want the gradation to be faithfully reproduced, set the exposure compensation to a negative amount and shoot again for a better result.
    • Page 398
      B: Shooting Information Display Histogram The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33: Histogram disp]. [Brightness] display Sample Histograms This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of the image’s brightness level.
    • Page 399: H Index Display (Multiple-Image Display)

      H Index display (Multiple-image Display) Search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9, 36, or 100 images on one screen. Press the <u> button. During image playback or when the camera is ready to shoot, press the <u>…

    • Page 400: Jump Display (Jumping Through Images)

      e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through the images forward or backward according to the jump method set. Select [Image jump w/6]. Under the [32] tab, select [Image jump w/6], then press <0>.

    • Page 401
      e Jump Display (Jumping Through Images) Browse by jumping. Press the <x> button to play back images. In the single-image display, turn the <6> dial. You can browse by the set method. Jump method Playback position To search images by shooting date, select [g: Date]. To search images by folder, select [h: Folder].
    • Page 402: Filtering Images For Playback

      Filtering Images for Playback You can play back images filtered according to search conditions. After setting the image search conditions, you can play back and display only the found images. Note that the following can be done for the found images: Erase protection, rating, slide show, deletion, print order, and photobook order.

    • Page 403
      t Filtering Images for Playback Implement the search conditions. Read the message that appears. Select [OK], then press <0>. The search condition is specified. Display the found images. Press the <3> button to play back images. Only the images that match the set conditions (filtered) will be played back.
    • Page 404: Magnifying Images

      u Magnifying Images You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD monitor. Magnify the image. The image can be magnified as follows: 1. During image playback, 2. During the image review after image capture, and 3. From the shooting- ready state.

    • Page 405
      u Magnifying Images 3 Setting the Initial Magnification Ratio and Position Under the [33] tab, when you select [Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the initial magnification ratio and position for the magnified view. 1x (no magnification) The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the single-image display.
    • Page 406: Playing Back With The Touch Screen

      d Playing Back with the Touch Screen The LCD monitor is a touch-sensitive panel that you can touch with your fingers for various playback operations. First, press the <x> button to play back images. Browsing Images Swipe with one finger. With single-image display, touch the LCD monitor with one finger.

    • Page 407
      d Playing Back with the Touch Screen Reducing Image (Index Display) Pinch two fingers. Touch the screen with two fingers spread apart, and pinch your fingers together on the screen. Each time you pinch your fingers, the image will shrink. If you pinch the single-image display, it will change to the 4-image index display.
    • Page 408: Rotating The Image

      b Rotating the Image You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation. Select [Rotate image]. Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate image], then press <0>. Select an image. Turn the <5> dial to select the image to be rotated. You can also select an image in the index display (p.399).

    • Page 409: K Protecting Images

      K Protecting Images You can protect important images from being accidentally erased by the camera’s erase function. 3 Protecting a Single Image Select [Protect images]. Under the [31] tab, select [Protect images], then press <0>. Select [Select images]. An image will be displayed. Select the image to be protected.

    • Page 410
      K Protecting Images 3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Protected While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to protect all the specified images at once. Select [Select range].
    • Page 411
      K Protecting Images 3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card] in [31: Protect images], all the images in the folder or on the card will be protected.
    • Page 412: Setting Ratings

      p Setting Ratings You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating. 3 Rating a Single Image Select [Rating]. Under the [32] tab, select [Rating], then press <0>. Select [Select images].

    • Page 413
      p Setting Ratings 3 Rating by Specifying the Range While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to rate all the specified images at once. Select [Select range]. Select [Select range] in [32: Rating], then press <0>.
    • Page 414
      p Setting Ratings 3 Rating All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can rate all the images in a folder or on a card at once. Under [32: Rating], when you select [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be rated.
    • Page 415: Q Quick Control For Playback

      Q Quick Control for Playback During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following: [J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW image processing (1 images only)], [S: Resize (JPEG image only)], [N: Cropping (JPEG images only)], [ : Highlight alert], [ : AF point display], [e: Image jump w/6], [t: Image search], and [q: Send images to smartphone*].

    • Page 416
      Q Quick Control for Playback Exit the setting. Press the <Q> button to exit the Quick Control. To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.435). If [51: Auto rotate] is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
    • Page 417: Enjoying Movies

      k Enjoying Movies The three main ways to play back and enjoy movies are as follows: Playback on a TV Set (p.427) By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play back the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set.

    • Page 418
      k Enjoying Movies Playback and Editing with a Computer The movie files recorded on the card can be transferred to a computer and played back or edited with pre-installed or general-purpose software compatible with the movie’s recording format. To play back or edit a movie with commercially-available software, use software compatible with MP4-format and MOV-format movies.
    • Page 419: Playing Back Movies

      k Playing Back Movies Play back the image. Press the <x> button to play back an image. Select a movie. Turn the <5> dial to select the movie to be played back. In the single-image display, the <s1> icon displayed on the upper left indicates a movie.

    • Page 420
      k Playing Back Movies Movie Playback Panel Operation Playback Description 7 Play* Pressing <0> toggles between playback and stop. Adjusts the slow motion speed by turning the <5> 8 Slow motion dial. The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of the screen.
    • Page 421
      k Playing Back Movies Playback with the Touch Screen Tap [7] at the center of the screen. The movie will start playing back. To display the movie playback panel, tap <s1> or <st> on the upper left of the screen. To pause the movie while it is playing back, tap on the screen.
    • Page 422: Editing A Movie’s First And Last Scenes

      X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec. increments. On the movie playback screen, select [X]. The movie editing panel will be displayed at the bottom of the screen. Specify the part to be edited out.

    • Page 423
      X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes Save the edited movie. Select [W], then press <0>. The save screen will appear. To save it as a new movie, select [New file]. To save it and overwrite the original movie file, select [Overwrite], then press <0>.
    • Page 424: Slide Show (Auto Playback)

      Slide Show (Auto Playback) You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show. Specify the images to be played back. To play back all the images on the card, go to step 2. If you want to specify the images to be played back in the slide show, filter the images with [Set image search conditions] under the [32] tab…

    • Page 425: Start The Slide Show

      3 Slide Show (Auto Playback) Transition effect Background music Start the slide show. Select [Start], then press <0>. After [Loading image…] is displayed, the slide show will start. Exit the slide show. To exit the slide show and return to the setting screen, press the <M>…

    • Page 426
      3 Slide Show (Auto Playback) Selecting the Background Music If you use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594) to copy background music tracks to the card, you can play the background music together with the slide show. Select [Background music]. Set [Background music] to [On], then press <0>.
    • Page 427: Viewing Images On A Tv Set

      Viewing Images on a TV Set By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable, you can play back the camera’s still photos and movies on the TV set. For the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is recommended. If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, check if the [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video system of your TV set).

    • Page 428
      Viewing Images on a TV Set When the camera is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, 4K time- lapse movies will be played back in Full HD quality (cannot be played back in 4K quality). Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot be adjusted with the camera.
    • Page 429
      Viewing Images on a TV Set Press the camera’s <x> button. An image will appear on the TV screen and you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback. Select an image. Point the remote control toward the TV set and press the button to select an image.
    • Page 430: L Erasing Images

      L Erasing Images You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.409) will not be erased. Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you no longer need the image before erasing it.

    • Page 431
      L Erasing Images 3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch By adding checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can erase all those images at once. Select [Erase images]. Under the [31] tab, select [Erase images], then press <0>.
    • Page 432
      L Erasing Images 3 Specifying the Range of Images to be Erased While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to erase all the specified images at once. Select [Select range].
    • Page 433
      L Erasing Images 3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When [31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
    • Page 434: Adjusting The Lcd Monitor Brightness

      Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness You can adjust the brightness of the LCD monitor to make it easier to view. Select [LCD brightness]. Under the [52] tab, select [LCD brightness], then press <0>. Adjust the brightness. Referring to the gray chart, press the <Y>…

    • Page 435: Setting The Auto Rotation Of Vertical Images

      Setting the Auto Rotation of Vertical Images Images shot in vertical orientation are rotated automatically to the proper orientation for viewing, so they will not be displayed in horizontal orientation when played back on the camera’s LCD monitor or viewed on a computer screen. You can change the setting of this feature.

    • Page 437: Post-Processing Images

      Post-Processing Images This chapter describes RAW image processing, JPEG image resizing, and JPEG image cropping. The M icon at the upper right of the page title indicates that the function is available only in Creative Zone modes (<d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, <F>). The camera may not be able to process images taken with another camera.

    • Page 438: R Processing Raw Images With The Camera

      R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.

    • Page 439
      R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN Displaying the setting screen Press <0> to display the selected function’s setting screen. Turn the <6> or <5> dial to change the setting. Press <0> to finalize the setting and return to the previous screen.
    • Page 440
      R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN Magnified View You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The magnification will vary depending on the [Image quality] setting under [x1: RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the magnified image.
    • Page 441: Brightness Adjustment

      R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN RAW Image Processing Options Brightness adjustment You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect. White balance (p.185) You can select the white balance. If you select [Q] and press the <B>…

    • Page 442
      R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN Color space (p.208) You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the difference in the image will hardly be perceptible when either color space is set. Lens aberration correction (p.200) Peripheral illumination correction…
    • Page 443
      R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN (p.203) Diffraction correction The diffraction by the lens aperture degrading the image sharpness can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.440).
    • Page 444: S Resizing Jpeg Images

      S Resizing JPEG Images You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, and a images. JPEG b and RAW images cannot be resized. Select [Resize].

    • Page 445
      S Resizing JPEG Images Resize Options by Original Image Quality Available Resize Settings Original Image Quality Image Sizes Sizes for resized images are shown below. (Approx. pixels) Image Quality Full-frame (3:2) 4:3 (aspect ratio) 4160×2768* (11.5 megapixels) 3680×2768* (10.2 megapixels) 3120×2080 (6.5 megapixels) 2768×2080* (5.8 megapixels) 2400×1600 (3.8 megapixels)
    • Page 446: N Cropping Jpeg Images

      N Cropping JPEG Images You can crop a captured JPEG image and save it as another image. Cropping an image is possible only with JPEG 3, 4, a, and b images. Images shot in RAW cannot be cropped. Select [Cropping]. Under the [x2] tab, select [Cropping], then press <0>.

    • Page 447
      N Cropping JPEG Images Moving the Cropping Frame Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired image area. Correcting the Tilt You can correct image tilt by ±10°. Press the <B> button, then while checking the tilt against the grid, turn the <5>…
    • Page 449: Sensor Cleaning

      Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases, lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.

    • Page 450: Automatic Sensor Cleaning

      f Automatic Sensor Cleaning Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit automatically shakes off the dust on the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this operation. However, you can manually perform sensor cleaning or can disable this unit as follows.

    • Page 451
      f Automatic Sensor Cleaning For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed upright and stable on a table or other flat surface. Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much. Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf] option remains disabled temporarily.
    • Page 452: Appending Dust Delete Data

      Appending Dust Delete DataN Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust that may be visible on captured images. However, for the case where visible dust still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for erasing the dust spots later.

    • Page 453
      3 Appending Dust Delete DataN Shoot a solid-white object. At a distance of 20 cm — 30 cm (0.7 ft. — 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a patternless, solid-white object and take a picture. The picture will be taken in aperture- priority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
    • Page 454: Dust Delete Data

      3 Appending Dust Delete DataN Dust Delete Data After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it again.

    • Page 455: Manual Sensor Cleaning

      Before cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera. The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is recommended. Select [Sensor cleaning].

    • Page 456
      If the battery level becomes low while cleaning the sensor, the beeper will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor. If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
    • Page 457: Print Order And Photobook Set-Up

      Print order and Photobook Set-up Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.458) You can specify printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. for the images recorded on the card. Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.464) You can specify the images for printing in a photobook from those saved on the card.

    • Page 458: W Digital Print Order Format (Dpof)

      W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print images recorded on the card according to your printing instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print, etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or create a print order for a photofinisher.

    • Page 459
      W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Standard Prints one image on one sheet. Multiple thumbnail images are printed on Index one sheet. Print type Both Prints both the standard and index prints. [On] imprints the recorded date of the captured Date image.
    • Page 460
      W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) RAW images or movies cannot be specified for printing. If you print an image with a large image size using the [Index] or [Both] setting (p.458), the index print may not be printed with certain printers. In such a case, resize the image (p.444), then print the index print.
    • Page 461
      W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) 3 Specifying Images for Printing Selecting Images Select and specify the images one by one. If you press the <u> button and turn the <6> dial counterclockwise, you can select an image from a three-image display.
    • Page 462
      W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) Selecting Multiple Images Select Range Under [Multiple], select [Select range]. Select the first and last images of the desired range, then all the images in the range will be marked with the checkmark [X]. A print order for one copy of each image will be set.
    • Page 463
      W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) If the search conditions are set with [32: Set image search conditions] (p.402) and you select [Multiple], the display will change to [Mark all found images] and [Clear all found images]. All found images If you select [Mark all found images], a print order for one copy of all the images filtered by the search…
    • Page 464: Specifying Images For A Photobook

      p Specifying Images for a Photobook You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer, the specified images for a photobook will be copied to a dedicated folder.

    • Page 465
      p Specifying Images for a Photobook 3 Specifying the Image Range for a Photobook While looking at the images in the index display, you can specify the first and last images for a range to all the specified images at once. Select [Multiple].
    • Page 466
      p Specifying Images for a Photobook 3 Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once for a photobook. Under [x1: Photobook Set-up], you can set [Multiple] to [All images in folder] or [All images on card] to specify all the images in the folder or on…
    • Page 467: Customizing The Camera

      Customizing the Camera You can make fine adjustments to various camera functions and change the functionality of buttons and dials to suit your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions and Custom Controls. You can also save the camera’s current settings to the <w>…

    • Page 468: Setting Custom Functions

      Setting Custom FunctionsN Select the [8] tab. Select the desired group. Select [C.Fn I: Exposure], [C.Fn II: Autofocus], or [C.Fn III: Operation/ Others], then press <0>. Select the Custom Function Custom Function number number. Press the <Y> <Z> keys to select the Custom Function number, then press <0>.

    • Page 469: Custom Functions

      Custom FunctionsN C.Fn I: Exposure A LV k Movie Shooting Shooting Exposure level increments ISO speed setting increments p.471 Bracketing auto cancel Bracketing sequence p.472 Number of bracketed shots Safety shift p.473 Exposure compensation auto cancel p.474 Metering mode, AE locked after focus C.Fn II: AF A LV k Movie…

    • Page 470
      3 Custom FunctionsN A LV k Movie C.Fn II: AF Shooting Shooting AF area selection method p.482 Orientation linked AF point p.483 Initial AF point, AI Servo AF p.484 Auto AF point selection: Color p.485 AF point selection movement p.486 AF point display during focus p.487 Viewfinder display illumination…
    • Page 471: Custom Function Settings

      Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I: Exposure C.Fn I-1 Exposure level increments 0: 1/3-stop 1: 1/2-stop Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. When [1:1/2-stop] is set, the display will be as shown below. C.Fn I-2 ISO speed setting increments 0: 1/3-stop…

    • Page 472
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I-4 Bracketing sequence The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence can be changed. 0: 09-9+ 1: -909+ 2: +909- White Balance Bracketing B/A Direction M/G Direction 0 : Standard exposure 0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance — : Decreased exposure — : Blue bias — : Magenta bias + : Increased exposure + : Amber bias…
    • Page 473: Safety Shift

      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I-6 Safety shift 0: Disable 1: Shutter speed/Aperture Takes effect in the <s> shutter-priority AE and <f> aperture- priority AE modes. If the subject brightness changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected setting to obtain the standard exposure.

    • Page 474
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn I-7 Exposure compensation auto cancel 0: Disable The exposure compensation setting will not be canceled even if you set the power switch to <2>. 1: Enable When you set the power switch to <2>, the exposure compensation setting will be canceled.
    • Page 475: Functions

      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II: AF C.Fn II-1 Tracking sensitivity Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity during AI Servo AF when an obstacle cuts across the AF points or when the subject strays from the AF point. Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general. Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1 The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an obstacle cuts across the AF points or if the subject strays from the…

    • Page 476
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-2 Acceleration/deceleration tracking This sets the tracking sensitivity for moving subjects whose speed can momentarily change dramatically by starting or stopping suddenly, etc. Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minor changes in moving speed).
    • Page 477
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-3 AF point auto switching This sets the switching sensitivity of the AF points as they track the subject moving dramatically up, down, left, or right. This setting takes effect when the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF, Large Zone AF, or Automatic selection AF.
    • Page 478
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-4 AI Servo 1st image priority You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for the first shot with AI Servo AF. Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and shutter release. Release priority Pressing the shutter button takes the picture immediately even if focus has not been achieved.
    • Page 479
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-5 AI Servo 2nd image priority With AI Servo AF for continuous shooting, you can preset the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing for the subsequent shots after the first shot in continuous shooting. Equal priority Equal priority is given to focusing and continuous shooting speed.
    • Page 480
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-6 AF-assist beam firing Enables or disables the EOS-dedicated external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam. 0: Enable The external Speedlite emits the AF-assist beam when necessary. 1: Disable The external Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam. This prevents the AF-assist beam from disturbing others.
    • Page 481
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-7 Lens drive when AF impossible If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera keep searching for the precise focus or have it stop searching. 0: Continue focus search If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, the lens is driven to search for the precise focus.
    • Page 482
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-9 AF area selection method You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode. 0: S 9 AF area selection button After you press the <S> or <B> button, pressing the <B> button will change the AF area selection mode.
    • Page 483
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-10 Orientation linked AF point You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting. 0: Same for both vert/horiz The same AF area selection mode and manually-selected AF point (or zone) are used for both vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
    • Page 484
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-11 Initial AF Point, AI Servo AF You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area selection mode is set to Auto selection AF. 0: Auto The AF point that AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to suit the shooting conditions.
    • Page 485
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-12 Auto AF point selection: Color tracking Use this function to autofocus by recognizing colors equivalent to skin tones. This function works when the AF area selection mode is set to Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), or Automatic selection AF.
    • Page 486
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-13 AF point selection movement You can set either to stop the selection at the outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side in AF point selection. 0: Stops at AF area edges Useful if you often use an AF point along the edge.
    • Page 487
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-14 AF point display during focus You can set whether to display the AF point(s) before AF starts (shooting ready), when AF starts, during AF, when focus is achieved, and when the metering timer is active after focus is achieved. 0 : Selected (constant) 1 : All (constant) 2 : Selected (pre-AF,focused)
    • Page 488
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn II-15 Viewfinder display illumination You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder will light up in red when focus is achieved. 0: Auto The AF points achieving focus in low light or with a dark subject will automatically light up in red.
    • Page 489
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn III: Operation/Others C.Fn III-1 Warnings z in viewfinder When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.31). Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, then press <0>…
    • Page 490
      3 Custom Function SettingsN C.Fn III-2 Dial direction during Tv/Av 0: Normal 1: Reverse direction Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture can be reversed. In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and <5>…
    • Page 491: 8: Fine Adjustment Of Af’s Point Of Focus

      8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the adjustment, read “General Cautions for AF Microadjustment” and “Notes for AF Microadjustment” on page 496. Normally, this adjustment is not required.

    • Page 492
      8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Make the adjustment. Set the adjustment amount. The adjustable range is ±20 steps. Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the point of focus in front of the standard point of focus. Setting it toward “+: ”…
    • Page 493
      8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN 2: Adjust by Lens You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses. When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
    • Page 494
      8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Entering the Serial Number Select the digit to be entered, then press <0> so r> is displayed. < Enter the number, then press <0>. After entering all the digits, select [OK]. Lens Serial Number In step 3, if “*”…
    • Page 495
      8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN Make the adjustment. Single focal length lens For a zoom lens, select the wide- angle (W) or telephoto (T) end. Pressing <0> will turn off the orange frame and make the adjustment possible. Set the adjustment amount, then press <0>.
    • Page 496
      8: Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the intermediate range.
    • Page 497: 8: Custom Controls

      8: Custom ControlsN You can assign frequently-used functions to camera buttons or dials according to your preferences for easy operations. Select [C.Fn III: Operation/ Others]. Under the [8] tab, select [C.Fn III: Operation/Others], then press <0>. Select [4: Custom Controls]. The Custom Controls setting screen will appear.

    • Page 498
      8: Custom ControlsN Assignable Functions to Camera Controls Function Page Metering and AF start AF stop ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO Direct AF point selection Pause Movie Servo AF Metering start AE lock/FE lock AE lock (hold) AE lock AE lock (while button pressed) FE lock Set ISO speed (hold button, turn Exposure compensation (hold button, turn…
    • Page 499
      8: Custom ControlsN < > stands for “AF stop button” provided on super telephoto lenses equipped with Image Stabilizer.
    • Page 500
      8: Custom ControlsN : Metering and AF start When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF are performed. : AF stop The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this function. Useful when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF. : ONE SHOT z AI SERVO/SERVO You can switch the AF operation.
    • Page 501
      8: Custom ControlsN Exposure : Metering start When you press the shutter button halfway, exposure metering is performed. (AF is not performed.) : AE lock/FE lock When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the exposure (AE lock) while the metering timer is active. Useful when you want to set the focus and exposure separately.
    • Page 502
      8: Custom ControlsN : FE lock For flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function will fire a preflash and retain the required flash output (FE lock). : Set ISO speed (hold button, turn You can set the ISO speed by holding down the button assigned with this function and turning the <6>…
    • Page 503
      8: Custom ControlsN Image : Image quality Press <0> to display the recording quality setting screen (p.162) on the LCD monitor. : Picture Style Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection screen (p.176) on the LCD monitor. : White balance selection Press <0>…
    • Page 504
      8: Custom ControlsN : Flash function settings Press <0> to display the flash function setting screen (p.283). : Wi-Fi function Press <0> to display the wireless communication setting screen (p.540). : No function (disabled) Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the button.
    • Page 505: Registering My Menu

      Registering My MenuN Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name the registered menu tabs, and press the <M> button to display the My Menu tab first. Creating and Adding My Menu Tab Select [Add My Menu tab].

    • Page 506
      3 Registering My MenuN Select [Select items to register]. Register the desired items. Select the option to be set, then press <0>. Select [OK] on the confirmation dialog. You can register up to six items. To return to the screen in step 2, press the <M>…
    • Page 507: Enter Text

      3 Registering My MenuN Delete tab You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab. Rename tab You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*]. Select [Rename tab]. Enter text. Press the <L>…

    • Page 508
      3 Registering My MenuN Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items You can delete all the created My Menu tabs or My Menu items registered under them. Delete all My Menu tabs You can delete all My Menu tabs you created. When you select [Delete all My Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
    • Page 509
      3 Registering My MenuN Menu Display Settings You can select [Menu display] to set the menu screen that is to appear first when you press the <M> button. Normal display Displays the last displayed menu screen. Display from My Menu tab Displays with the [9] tab selected.
    • Page 510: W: Registering Custom Shooting Modes

      w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting functions, menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting modes under the Mode Dial’s <w> and <x> positions. Select [Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)]. Under the [55] tab, select [Custom shooting mode (C1, C2)], then press <0>.

    • Page 511: Menu Functions

      w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes. Even in the <w> and <x> modes, you can still change shooting function settings and menu settings. Settings To Be Registered Shooting Function Settings Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation, AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode, Exposure compensation amount, AEB increment, Flash exposure compensation amount…

    • Page 512
      w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN [z4 (Movie shooting)] Movie Servo AF, AF method, Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity, Movie Servo AF speed, Metering timer, Grid, V button function [z5 (Movie shooting)] Video snapshot, Time-lapse movie (setting), Movie digital IS, Remote control [x2] Slide show (settings), Image jump with 6 [x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram display, Magnification (approx.)
    • Page 513: Reference

      Reference This chapter provides reference information for system accessories, camera features, etc. Certification Logo Select [55: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the camera body, and on the camera’s package.

    • Page 514: System Map

      System Map ST-E2 ST-E3-RT 270EX II 430EX III-RT/ 600EX II-RT Macro Ring Lite Macro Twin Lite 430EX III MR-14EX II MT-24EX Bundled Accessories Eyepiece Extender EP-EX15 Eyecup Eb Rubber Frame Eb E-series Dioptric Adjustment Lenses Strap Angle Finder C Battery Pack Battery Charger LP-E6N LC-E6…

    • Page 515
      System Map Directional Stereo Timer Remote Remote Wireless Microphone Controller Switch Controller DM-E1 TC-80N3 RS-80N3 LC-5 Remote Wireless Controller Remote RC-6 Control BR-E1 EF lenses HDMI Cable HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.) TV/Monitor Interface Cable IFC-400PCU (1.3 m/4.3 ft.) Connect Station Interface Cable CS100 IFC-200U (1.9 m/6.2 ft.)
    • Page 516: Checking The Battery Information

      Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full performance may not be attained or malfunction may result. The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movie shooting is not counted.)

    • Page 517
      3 Checking the Battery Information Registering Batteries to the Camera You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 batteries to the camera. To register multiple batteries to the camera, follow the procedure below for each battery. Press the <B> button. With the battery info. screen displayed, press the <B>…
    • Page 518
      3 Checking the Battery Information Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries It is convenient to label each registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 with their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels. Write the serial number on a Serial number label. Write the serial number displayed on the battery history screen on a label approx.
    • Page 519
      3 Checking the Battery Information Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery You can check the remaining capacity of any battery (even when not installed) and also when it was last used. Look for the serial number. Serial number Date last used Refer to the battery’s serial number label and look for the battery’s serial number on the battery history screen.
    • Page 520: Using A Household Power Outlet

      Using a Household Power Outlet You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (each sold separately). Place the cord in the groove. Carefully insert the DC coupler’s cord into the groove without damaging the cord.

    • Page 521
      Using a Household Power Outlet Do not use an AC adapter other than the AC-E6N (sold separately). While the camera’s power switch is on, do not connect or disconnect the power cord or connector, or disconnect the DC coupler. After using the camera, unplug the power plug from the power outlet. AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
    • Page 522: H Using Eye-Fi Cards

      H Using Eye-Fi Cards With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can automatically transfer captured images to a computer or upload them to an online service via a wireless LAN. The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or contact the card manufacturer.

    • Page 523
      H Using Eye-Fi Cards Display the connection information. Select [Connection info.], then press <0>. Check the [Access point SSID:]. Check that an access point is displayed for [Access point SSID:]. You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s MAC address and firmware version. Press the <M>…
    • Page 524
      H Using Eye-Fi Cards Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards Under [Wi-Fi settings] of [51: Wireless communication settings], if [Wi-Fi] set to [Enable], image transfer with an Eye-Fi card will not be possible. If “J” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card information.
    • Page 526: Function Availability Table By Shooting Mode

      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting (A, C, Creative Zone) o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled Function Shooting with ambience selection Background blur setting Image-recording quality JPEG Aspect ratio Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set Auto Picture Style Manual selection…

    • Page 527
      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting* Drive Silent continuous shooting* 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous Evaluative metering Partial metering Metering Spot metering Center-weighted average metering Program shift Exposure compensation AE lock…
    • Page 528
      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting (8: 2 q 3 5C r) o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled Function Brightness Color tone Panning effect Image-recording quality JPEG Aspect ratio Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set Auto Picture Style Manual selection…
    • Page 529
      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting* Drive Silent continuous shooting* 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous Evaluative metering Partial metering Metering Spot metering Center-weighted average metering Program shift Exposure compensation AE lock…
    • Page 530
      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Still Photo Shooting (8: 4 P y 6 F G) o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled Function Brightness Color tone Panning effect Image-recording quality JPEG Aspect ratio Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set Auto Picture Style…
    • Page 531
      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Function Single shooting High-speed continuous shooting Low-speed continuous shooting Silent single shooting* Drive Silent continuous shooting* 10-sec. self-timer/Remote control 2-sec. self-timer/Remote control Self-timer: Continuous Evaluative metering Partial metering Metering Spot metering Center-weighted average metering Program shift Exposure compensation AE lock…
    • Page 532
      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode Movie Shooting o: Set automatically k: User selectable : Not selectable/Disabled A/C 8 d/s/f/F Function Movie recording quality selectable Auto Custom Sound recording Wind filter Attenuator HDR movie Time-lapse movie Full HD Video snapshot Automatically set/Auto ISO speed Manually set…
    • Page 533
      Function Availability Table by Shooting Mode d/s/f/F Function u+Tracking Smooth zone Live 1-point AF Manual focusing (MF) Movie servo AF • Tracking sensitivity • AF speed Metering Program shift Exposure Exposure compensation AE lock GPS function Remote control shooting Quick Control Touch operation *1: Automatically set to NTSC: L 6 X/PAL:L 5 X.
    • Page 534: Menu Settings

      3Menu Settings Viewfinder Shooting (Basic Zone Modes) z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page 1 / 41 / 61 Image quality* 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b Image review time Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold Release shutter Enable / Disable without card…

    • Page 535
      3Menu Settings Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting (Creative Zone Modes) z: Shooting 1* (Red) Page 1 / 41 / 61 Image quality 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b Image review time* Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold Release shutter Enable / Disable without card*…
    • Page 536
      3Menu Settings z: Shooting 2 (Red) Page Exposure compensation: ±5 stops* in 1/3- or Exposure 1/2-stop increments compensation/ AEB setting* AEB: ±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments ISO speed / ISO speed range / Auto range / zISO speed settings* Minimum shutter speed Disable / Low / Standard / High Auto Lighting …
    • Page 537: Software

      3Menu Settings z: Shooting 3 (Red) Page DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait / RLandscape / uFine Detail / Picture Style SNeutral / UFaithful / VMonochrome / WUser Defined 1-3 Noise reduction for Disable / Auto / Enable long exposures* High ISO speed noise Disable / Low / Standard / High / Multi Shot reduction Noise Reduction*…

    • Page 538
      3Menu Settings z: Shooting 4 (Red) Page Interval timer* Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots) Bulb timer Disable / Enable (Exposure time) Anti-flicker shooting* Disable / Enable Mirror lockup* Disable / Enable Aspect ratio 3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1 Live View shooting* Enable / Disable *1: Not displayed for Live View shooting.
    • Page 539
      3Menu Settings 3: Playback 1 (Blue) Page Protect images Protect images Rotate image Rotate images Erase images Erase images Print order Specify images to be printed (DPOF) Photobook set-up Specify images for a photobook RAW image processing Process 1 images 3: Playback 2 (Blue) Page Cropping…
    • Page 540
      3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 1 (Yellow) Page Select folder Create and select a folder Numbering: Continuous / Auto reset File numbering Manual reset Vertical image auto OnzD / OnD / Off rotation Format card Erase data on the card by formatting Displayed when a commercially-available Eye- Eye-Fi settings Fi card is inserted…
    • Page 541
      3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 2 (Yellow) Page 1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30 Auto power off min. / Disable LCD brightness LCD brightness adjustable to 7 levels LCD off/on* Remains on / Shutter btn. Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) / Date/Time/Zone Daylight saving time / Time zone…
    • Page 542
      3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 4 (Yellow): For viewfinder shooting Page Touch operation Standard / Sensitive / Disable Beep Enable / Touch / Disable Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter Battery information count / Recharge performance Auto cleaningf: Enable / Disable Sensor cleaning Clean nowf Clean manually…
    • Page 543: Software

      3Menu Settings 5: Set-up 5 (Yellow) Page Custom shooting Register setting / Clear settings / Auto update modes (C1, C2) settings Clear all camera Resets the camera to the default settings settings Display copyright information / Enter author’s Copyright information name / Enter copyright details / Delete copyright information URL and QR code for downloading Instruction…

    • Page 544
      3Menu Settings 8: Custom Functions (Orange) Page C.Fn I: Exposure C.Fn II: Autofocus Customize camera functions as desired C.Fn III: Operation/ Others Clear all Custom Clear Custom Function settings Functions (C.Fn) 9: My Menu (Green) Page Add My Menu tab Add My Menu tabs 1-5 Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all items…
    • Page 545
      3Menu Settings Movie Shooting z: Shooting 1 (Red) Page 1920×1080 / 1280×720 NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p Movie recording size PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p Standard (IPB) / Light (IPB) Sound recording* : Auto / Manual / Disable Sound-recording level Sound recording Wind filter: Auto / Disable Attenuator: Disable / Enable…
    • Page 546
      3Menu Settings z: Shooting 4* (Red) Page Movie Servo AF Enable / Disable AF method u+Tracking / Smooth zone / Live 1-point AF Movie Servo AF Locked on (-3/-2/-1) / 0 / Responsive (+1/+2/+3) tracking sensitivity When active: Always on / During shooting Movie Servo AF Speed AF speed: Slow (-7/-6/-5/-4/-3/-2/-1) / Standard / Fast (+1/+2)
    • Page 547
      3Menu Settings z: Shooting 5* (Red) Page Video snapshot: Enable / Disable Album settings: Create a new album / Add to Video snapshot existing album Show confirm message: Enable / Disable Time-lapse movie: Disable / Enable H(3840×2160) / Enable L(1920×1080) Shooting interval (hr., min., sec.) Number of shots Time-lapse movie…
    • Page 548: Troubleshooting Guide

      The battery does not recharge. If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.516) is 94% or higher, the battery will not be recharged. Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6. The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.

    • Page 549
      [Does this battery/do these batteries display the Canon logo?] is displayed. Do not use any battery other than genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6. Remove and install the battery again (p.42). If the electrical contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
    • Page 550
      Troubleshooting Guide The camera turns off by itself. Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.73). Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will still turn off after the camera is left idle for approx.
    • Page 551
      Troubleshooting Guide The card cannot be used. If a card error message is displayed, see page 45 or 567. An error message is displayed when the card is inserted in another camera. Since SDXC cards are formatted in exFAT, if you format a card with this camera and then insert it into another camera, an error may be displayed and it may not be possible to use the card.
    • Page 552
      Troubleshooting Guide There are fewer AF points or the Area AF frame shape is different. Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and patterns and Area AF frame shape vary. The lenses are categorized into 8 groups from A to H (p.145). Check which group your lens belongs to.
    • Page 553
      The maximum burst shown in the table on page 164 is based on Canon’s testing card. (The faster the card’s writing speed, the higher the actual maximum burst will be.) Therefore, the maximum burst displayed in the viewfinder may differ from the actual maximum burst.
    • Page 554
      Troubleshooting Guide ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected. If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO speed range will be ISO 200 — ISO 40000 (for still photo shooting). Even if you set [ISO speed range] to expand the setting range, you cannot select L (equivalent to ISO 50), H1 (equivalent to ISO 51200), or H2 (equivalent to ISO 102400).
    • Page 555
      The flash does not fire. Make sure the flash is securely attached to the camera. If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z5: Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.303). The flash always fires at full output.
    • Page 556
      Troubleshooting Guide Remote control shooting is not possible. When taking still photos, set the drive mode to <Q> or <k> (p.157). When shooting movies, set [z5: Remote control] to [Enable] (p.381). Check the position of the remote controller’s release timing switch.
    • Page 557
      Troubleshooting Guide Shot images are not displayed when continuous shooting is performed during Live View shooting. If the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the shot images are not displayed during continuous shooting (p.291). During movie shooting, the red E icon is displayed. It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high.
    • Page 558
      Troubleshooting Guide The manually set ISO speed changes when switching to movie shooting. For viewfinder shooting and Live View shooting, the ISO speed will be set according to [ISO speed range] under [z2: zISO speed settings] (p.173). For movie shooting, the ISO speed will be set according to [ISO speed range] under [z2: kISO speed settings] (p.372).
    • Page 559
      Troubleshooting Guide The subject looks distorted during movie shooting. If you move the camera to the left or right (panning) or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted. The problem may be more noticeable in time-lapse movie shooting. I cannot take still photos during movie shooting.
    • Page 560
      Troubleshooting Guide Operation Problems I cannot change the setting with the <6>, <5>, <9>, or <d>. Set the <R> switch downward (lock release) (p.59). Check the [54: Multi function lock] setting (p.88). Touch operation is not possible. Make sure [54: Touch control] is set to [Standard] or [Sensitive] (p.69).
    • Page 561
      Troubleshooting Guide The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”). Set [z2: Color space] to [sRGB]. If [Adobe RGB] is set, the first character will be an underscore (p.208). The file name starts with “MVI_”. It is a movie file (p.211). The file numbering does not start from 0001.
    • Page 562
      Troubleshooting Guide [###] is displayed. If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the camera can display, [###] will be displayed. In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow. In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal) characteristics.
    • Page 563
      Troubleshooting Guide Playback Problems Part of the image blinks in black. [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.397). A red box is displayed on the image. [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.397). During image playback, the AF points are not displayed. The AF points are not displayed when the following types of images are played back: •…
    • Page 564
      Troubleshooting Guide Operation sound and mechanical sound can be heard during movie playback. If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the operation sound will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.347).
    • Page 565: Software

      Troubleshooting Guide My card reader does not recognize the card. Depending on the card reader used and the computer’s operating system, SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable (sold separately), then transfer the images to the computer using EOS Utility (EOS software, p.594).

    • Page 566: Software

      Troubleshooting Guide Sensor Cleaning Problems The shutter makes a sound during sensor cleaning. Under [54: Sensor cleaning], when you select [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a mechanical sound during the cleaning, but no picture will be recorded to the card (p.450). Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.

    • Page 567: Error Codes

      Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the lens contacts. Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a genuine Canon lens, or remove and install the battery again (p.27, 28, 42). Card cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card or format card with the camera.

    • Page 568: Specifications

      Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data • Recording System Recording format: Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0 Image type: JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original), RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible Pixels recorded: L (Large) : Approx. 26.0 megapixels (6240 x 4160) M (Medium) : Approx.

    • Page 569: Image Processing During Shooting

      Specifications • Image Processing During Shooting Picture Style: Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Fine Detail, Neutral, Faithful, Monochrome, User Defined 1 — 3 White balance: Auto (Ambience priority), Auto (White priority), Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light, White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature setting (approx.

    • Page 570: Exposure Control

      Specifications • Autofocus (during viewfinder shooting) Type: TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference detection with the dedicated AF sensor AF points: Max. 45 points (Cross-type AF point: Max. 45 points) * Number of available AF points, Dual cross-type AF points, and Cross-type AF points vary depending on the lens used.

    • Page 571
      Specifications Shooting mode: Basic Zone modes: Scene Intelligent Auto, Creative Auto, Special Scene (Portrait, Group Photo, Landscape, Sports, Kids, Panning, Close-up, Food, Candlelight, Night Portrait, Handheld Night Scene, HDR Backlight Control) Creative Zone modes: Program AE, Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb exposure, Custom shooting modes (C1/C2) ISO speed…
    • Page 572: Multiple Exposures

      Specifications • Multiple Exposures Number of multiple 2 to 9 exposures exposures: Multiple-exposure control:Additive, average • Shutter Type: Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter Shutter speed: 1/4000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range; available range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync at 1/180 sec.

    • Page 573
      Specifications * Based on Canon’s standard testing SD card (Standard: 8 GB, High-speed: 16 GB, UHS-I compatible) and standard testing conditions (High-speed continuous shooting, ISO 100, Standard Picture Style). * Figures in parentheses are the number of shots when a Canon’s standard testing UHS-I SD card is used.
    • Page 574
      Specifications • Movie Shooting Recording format: * For time-lapse movies: MOV format Movie: MPEG-4 AVC/H.264 Variable (Average) bit rate * For 4K time-lapse movies: Motion JPEG Audio: Movie recording size: Full HD (1920×1080), HD (1280×720) * For time-lapse movies: 4K (3840×2160) and Full HD selectable Frame rate: 59.94p/29.97p/23.98p (with NTSC)
    • Page 575
      Specifications [Time-lapse movie] (Reading speed) 4K Time-lapse movie (29.97p/25.00p) : UHS-I 90 MB/sec. or faster Full HD Time-lapse movie (29.97p/25.00p) : UHS-I Speed Class 3 or faster Focus method: Dual pixel CMOS AF AF method: Face+Tracking, Smooth zone, Live 1-point AF Manual focusing (approx.
    • Page 576
      Specifications ISO speed settings: For movie shooting, you can set the ISO speed range, maximum limit for ISO Auto, and maximum limit for time- lapse movie shooting with ISO Auto Sound recording: Built-in stereo microphones, external stereo microphone jack provided Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided, attenuator provided Grid display:…
    • Page 577: Print Ordering

      Specifications Highlight alert: Overexposed highlights blink AF point display: Provided (may not be displayed depending on shooting conditions) Grid display: 3 types Magnified view: Approx. 1.5x-10x, initial magnification and position settable Image search: Search conditions settable (by rating, date, folder, protected, file type) Image browsing method:1 image, 10 images, Specified number, Date, Folder, Movies, Stills, Protect, Rating…

    • Page 578
      Specifications Geotag information Latitude, Longitude, Elevation, Coordinated Universal appended to image: Time (UTC), Satellite signal acquisition status Position update interval: 1 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min., 5 min. Time setting: GPS time data set to camera Log data: One file per day, NMEA format * Change in time zone creates another file.
    • Page 579: Dimensions And Weight

      Working humidity: 85% or less All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines. Dimensions and weight listed above are based on CIPA Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).

    • Page 580
      The Bluetooth word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Canon Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
    • Page 581: Software

      Third party software This product includes third party software. expat.h Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the «Software»), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to…

    • Page 582
      Canon accessories. Therefore, using this product with genuine accessories is highly recommended. Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such as malfunction, fire, etc. caused by the failure of non-genuine Canon accessories (e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note…
    • Page 584
      If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment. Canon U.S.A. Inc. One Canon Park, Melville, NY 11747, U.S.A. Tel No. 1-800-OK-CANON (1-800-652-2666) CAN ICES-3 (B) / NMB-3 (B)
    • Page 585
      USA and Canada only: The Lithium ion/polymer battery that powers the product is recyclable. Please call 1-800-8-BATTERY for information on how to recycle this battery. For CA, USA only Included lithium battery contains Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/ for details.
    • Page 593: Software Start Guide / Downloading Images To A Computer

      Software Start Guide / Downloading Images to a Computer This chapter describes about the EOS software, how to download and install the software, how to use the Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files), and how to transfer images to a computer.

    • Page 594: Software Start Guide

      Software Start Guide Software Overview You can download the following EOS software from the Canon Web site (p.596). You cannot install the EOS software to a computer without an Internet connection. EOS Utility With the camera connected to a computer, EOS Utility enables you to transfer still photos and movies shot with the camera to the computer.

    • Page 595
      Software Start Guide Map Utility Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen by using the geotag location information recorded with GPS function. EOS MOVIE Utility This software enables you to play back the time-lapse movies you shot.
    • Page 596
      (The previous version will be overwritten.) Download the software. Connect to the Internet from a computer and access the following Canon Web site. www.canon.com/icpd Select your country or region of residence and download the software.
    • Page 597: Software Instruction Manuals

      Software Start Guide Downloading the Software Instruction Manuals Software Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon Web site to your computer. Software Instruction Manual Download Site www.canon.com/icpd To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version recommended) is required.

    • Page 598: Downloading Images To A Computer

      Downloading Images to a Computer You can use EOS software to download images from the camera to a computer. There are two ways to do this. Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer Install the software (p.596) Use the interface cable (sold separately) to connect the camera to the computer.

    • Page 599: Downloading Images With A Card Reader

      Downloading Images to a Computer Downloading Images with a Card Reader You can use a card reader to download images to a computer. Install the software (p.596) Insert the card into the card reader. Use Digital Photo Professional to download the images. Refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual (p.597).

    • Page 600: Index

      Index Numerics Area AF frame ….135, 140 Beeper ……..73 10- or 2-sec. self-timer….159 Color tracking….142, 485 w1280x720 (movie)….341 Cross-type focusing ….143 L1920x1080 (movie) ….341 Difficult subjects for AF ..153, 316 H3840x2160 Direct AF point selection..500 Dual cross-type focusing ..

    • Page 601
      Index Auto power off……47, 73 Auto reset……..213 w/x (Custom shooting) …. 510 Auto time setting (GPS) ….227 C(Creative Auto) ……100 Autofocus 9 AF Camera Automatic selection (AF)..135, 140 Camera shake…… 55, 96 Av (Aperture-priority AE)….238 Camera vibration blur..96, 265 Default settings ……
    • Page 602
      Index Contrast ……..181, 194 Downloading images to a Copyright information….214 computer ……..598 Creative Auto ……..100 DPOF Creative Zone modes …..36 (Digital Print Order Format)..458 Cropping (images) ……446 Dragging……… 68 Cross-type focusing ……143 Drive mode……..156 Custom Controls ……497 Dual cross-type focusing….
    • Page 603
      Index Faithful (U) …….178 Flash mode……..283 FAT32……..71, 345 Flash sync contacts ……28 FE lock ……….278 Flash sync. speed in Av mode ..282 Feature guide……..90 Focus indicator ……. 94, 131 Focus lock ……97, 131 (Flash Exposure Bracketing)..285 Focus mode switch..
    • Page 604
      Index HDR shooting …….253 Histogram …….. 398 Image-recording Help ……….91 quality …… 162, 164, 341 Text size ……..92 Index display……399 High dynamic range 9 HDR Jump display (image browsing) 400 High ISO speed noise reduction …195 Magnifying images….404 High-Definition ……341 Manual reset ……
    • Page 605
      Index Jump display ………400 AF operation ……305 Exposure simulation….303 u+Tracking ……309 Grid display ……302 Kids ……….113 Information display….293 Live 1-point AF……313 Manual focusing……. 321 Landscape ……..111 Metering timer ……302 Landscape (R)……177 Possible shots……291 Quick Control ……
    • Page 606
      Index Medium External microphone….347 File size……344, 345 (image-recording quality) ….164 Frame rate ……. 342 Memory cards 9 Cards Grid display……377 Menu……….64 HDR movie shooting….348 Dimmed menu items ….66 Information display….334 My Menu……..505 Manual exposure shooting..330 Setting procedure …….65 Metering timer……
    • Page 607
      Battery level ……. 48, 516 Long exposures ……197 Charging ……..40 Nomenclature……..28 Household power ….. 520 Non-Canon flash units ….280 Possible shots…. 48, 164, 291 Normal (Image-recording quality) .162 Recharge performance …. 516 NTSC ……342, 427, 541 Pressing completely ……. 56 Pressing halfway ……
    • Page 608
      Index Remote control terminal..28, 276 w/x (Custom shooting) ..510 C(Creative Auto) ….100 Remote controller ….271, 273 A (Scene Intelligent Auto)..94 Remote switch ……276 P (Program AE) ……. 234 Repeat (slide show) ……424 8 (Special scene) ….107 Resizing ……..444 Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ….
    • Page 609
      Index Standard (IPB) ……342 Standard (P)……177 Vari-angle LCD monitor …. 46, 99 M icon……….8 Vertical image auto rotation..435 Strap ……….38 Video snapshots ……361 Strength (Sharpness) ….181 Video system….341, 427, 541 Subjects difficult to Viewfinder focus ……153, 316, 374 Dioptric adjustment ….
    • Page 610
      The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of March 2017. For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date, contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual, refer to the Canon Web site.

    Понравилась статья? Поделить с друзьями:
  • Капли пропротен 100 от алкоголизма отзывы инструкция цена
  • Автоклав бытовой ижорский завод 1991 года инструкция
  • Капли грудной сбор от кашля инструкция по применению взрослым
  • Эторелекс инструкция к применению цена уколы
  • Пароварка morphy richards 470006 инструкция на русском языке